O9400s 1us4 V15 M PDF

Loop-O9400S-1US4
SDH/SONET ADM/TM
(STM-1/4 & OC-3/12)
Users Manual
LOOP TELECOMMUNICATION INTERNATIONAL, INC.

8F, NO. 8, HSIN ANN RD.
SCIENCE-BASED INDUSTRIAL PARK
HSINCHU, TAIWAN
Tel:
886-3-578-7696
Fax:
886-3-578-7695
2010 Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.

Version 15 19 AUG 2010
All rights reserved.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................................................1
1.1
1.2
DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................................................1
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................................................3
INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................................................................7
2.1
SITE PREPARATION..............................................................................................................................................7
2.2
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................7
2.2.1
Installation Overview .................................................................................................................................7
2.2.2
Power..........................................................................................................................................................7
2.2.3
Chassis Grounding......................................................................................................................................8
2.2.4
Power Connection ......................................................................................................................................8
2.2.5
Fiber Optic Line Connections.....................................................................................................................8
2.2.6
Console Port ...............................................................................................................................................9
2.2.7
Main Module ..............................................................................................................................................9
2.2.8
Tributary Modules ......................................................................................................................................9
2.2.9
Interfaces ....................................................................................................................................................9
INTERFACES ........................................................................................................................................................10
3.1
POWER SUPPLY .................................................................................................................................................10
3.1.1
Power module, -48V DC ..........................................................................................................................10
3.1.2
Power module, 100~240 Vac ...................................................................................................................11
3.2
ALARM INTERFACE.....................................................................................................................................11
3.2.1
Description ...............................................................................................................................................11
Connectors................................................................................................................................................................12
3.2.2
Electrical Parameters Alarm Input............................................................................................................12
3.2.3
Electrical Parameters Alarm Output.........................................................................................................13
3.3
VT-100 TERMINAL INTERFACE .................................................................................................................13
3.3.1
Description ...............................................................................................................................................13
3.3.2
Connector .................................................................................................................................................13
3.3.3
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................13
3.4
SYSTEM TIMING SOURCES AND CONNECTOR ....................................................................................................14
3.4.1
Connectors................................................................................................................................................15
3.4.2
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................15
3.5
16 E1/T1 ...........................................................................................................................................................16
3.5.1
Brief description .......................................................................................................................................16
3.5.2
Power consumption ..................................................................................................................................16
3.5.3
Connector type..........................................................................................................................................16
3.5.4
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................18
3.5.5
Functional Block Diagram........................................................................................................................18
3.6
E3/T3 INTERFACE CARD ...................................................................................................................................19
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
Connector type..........................................................................................................................................19
3.6.4
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................19
3.6.5
3.7
RS232 X 2 .........................................................................................................................................................21
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
Connector type..........................................................................................................................................21
3.7.4
Compliance...............................................................................................................................................21
3.7.5
3.8
ETHERNET INTERFACE ......................................................................................................................................23
3.8.1
Brief Description ......................................................................................................................................23
3.8.1.1
3.8.1.2
3.8.2
3.8.3
Ethernet Interface with Switch .............................................................................................................................. 23

Ethernet Interface without Switch ......................................................................................................................... 25
Power Consumption .................................................................................................................................26

RJ45 Connector ........................................................................................................................................27
OPERATION..........................................................................................................................................................28
4.1
SYSTEM ..........................................................................................................................................................28
4.1.1
Introduction ..............................................................................................................................................28
4.1.2
Technical overview ..................................................................................................................................28
4.1.2.1
4.1.2.2
4.1.2.3
4.1.2.4
4.1.2.5
4.2
5
Management port................................................................................................................................................... 28
VT100 Port............................................................................................................................................................ 28
Clock Source ......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Power .................................................................................................................................................................... 28
LEDs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 28
EXTERNAL ALARMS ..........................................................................................................................................32
SYSTEM OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................................................33

5.1
LOGON AND PASSWORD SETUP .........................................................................................................................40
5.1.1
Logon/off..................................................................................................................................................40
5.1.2
Change a Password...................................................................................................................................41
5.2
SYSTEM SETUP ..................................................................................................................................................44
5.2.1
Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................44
5.2.2
System Setup Procedure ...........................................................................................................................45
5.3
TIMING SOURCE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................47
5.3.1
5.3.2
Timing Source Setup Procedure ...............................................................................................................48
5.4
LOOPBACK TIMER SETUP ..................................................................................................................................50
5.4.1
5.4.2
LoopBack Timer Setup Procedure............................................................................................................51
5.5
BRIDGE AND RSTP INFO. SETUP .......................................................................................................................52
5.5.1
5.5.2
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup Procedure ...................................................................................................53
5.6
GATEWAY NETWORK ELEMENT SETUP .............................................................................................................55
5.6.1
5.6.2
Gateway Network Element Setup Procedure............................................................................................55
5.7
DHCP RELAY SETUP ........................................................................................................................................58
5.7.1
5.8
DHCP RELAY SETUP PROCEDURE ....................................................................................................................59
5.9
REMOTE MANAGEMENT SETUP .........................................................................................................................60
5.9.1
5.9.2
Remote Management Setup Procedure.....................................................................................................60
5.10 SNTP SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................63
5.10.1 Setup Screen Access.................................................................................................................................63
5.10.2 SNTP Setup Procedure .............................................................................................................................64
5.11 RS232 CONFIGURATION SETUP .........................................................................................................................65
5.11.2 RS232 Config Setup Procedure ................................................................................................................66
5.12 RS232 LOOPBACK TEST ....................................................................................................................................67
5.12.2 RS232 Loopback Test Setup Procedure ...................................................................................................68
5.13 HAND-WAVING LED SETUP ..............................................................................................................................69
5.13.2 Hand-waving LED Setup Procedure ........................................................................................................70
5.14 SNMP SYSTEM CONFIG SETUP .........................................................................................................................71
5.14.2 SNMP System Configuration Setup Procedure ........................................................................................72
5.15 SSH SETUP........................................................................................................................................................74
5.16 SDH/SONET MODE SETUP ..............................................................................................................................76
5.16.2 SDH/SONET Mode Setup Procedure.......................................................................................................76
5.17 SDH/SONET PROTECTION SETUP ....................................................................................................................79
5.17.2 SDH/SONET Protection Setup Procedure................................................................................................79
5.18 ALS/APSD SETUP ............................................................................................................................................82
ii
5.18.2 ALS/APSD Setup Procedure ....................................................................................................................83

5.19 SDH/SONET GRANULARITY SETUP .................................................................................................................84
5.19.2 SDH/SONET Granularity Setup Procedure..............................................................................................85
5.20 XC/TSA CREATE SETUP ...................................................................................................................................87
5.20.2 XC/TSA Create Setup ..............................................................................................................................88
5.21 XC/TSA DELETE SETUP ...................................................................................................................................92
5.21.2 XC/TSA Delete Setup ..............................................................................................................................93
5.22 XC/TSA MAP CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................94
5.22.2 XC/TSA Map Configuration Setup ..........................................................................................................95
5.23 SDH/SONET OVERHEAD SETUP ......................................................................................................................96
5.23.2 SDH/SONET Overhead Setup..................................................................................................................97
5.24 LINE LOOPBACK SETUP ...................................................................................................................................100
5.24.1 Setup Screen Access...............................................................................................................................101
5.24.2 Line Loopback Setup..............................................................................................................................101
5.25 MSP USER COMMAND ...................................................................................................................................103
5.25.2 MSP Command ......................................................................................................................................104
5.26 CUSTOMER INFORMATION SETUP ....................................................................................................................105
5.26.2 Customer Information Setup Procedure .................................................................................................106
5.27 ALARM SETUP .................................................................................................................................................107
5.27.2 System Alarm Setup ...............................................................................................................................108
5.27.3 SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................108
5.27.4 Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup .........................................................................................109
5.27.5 Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ...........................................................................................111
5.27.6 SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup.......................................................................................................112
5.27.7 SD/SF Threshold Setup ..........................................................................................................................113
5.27.8 External Alarm Setup .............................................................................................................................114
5.27.9 Insert AIS Alarm Setup ..........................................................................................................................114
5.28 CLEAR PERFORMANCE DATA ..........................................................................................................................116
5.28.2 Clear Performance Procedure.................................................................................................................116
5.29 SDH/SONET PERFORMANCE REPORT ............................................................................................................117
5.29.1 1-Hour Performance Report ...................................................................................................................117
5.29.2 24-Hour Performance Report .................................................................................................................117
5.29.3 7-Day Performance Report.....................................................................................................................118
5.30 PERFORMANCE TCA SETUP ............................................................................................................................119
5.30.2 Performance TCA Setup Procedure........................................................................................................119
5.31 STORE/RETRIEVE BACKUP CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................................121
5.32 DOWNLOAD CURRENT CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................................122
5.32.2 Download Current Configuration Procedure..........................................................................................122
5.33 DOWNLOAD FIRMWARE ..................................................................................................................................124
5.33.2 Download Firmware Setup Procedure....................................................................................................124
5.34 DOWNLOAD BACKUP CONFIGURATION ...........................................................................................................127
5.34.2 Download Backup Configuration Procedure..........................................................................................127
5.35 UPLOAD CURRENT CONFIGURATION FROM FLASH........................................................................................129
5.35.2 Upload Current Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................130
5.36 UPLOAD BACKUP CONFIGURATION FROM FLASH..........................................................................................131
5.36.2 Upload Backup Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................131
iii
5.37 CHANGE FIRMWARE BOOT BANK ...................................................................................................................133

5.37.2 Change Firmware Boot Bank Procedure ................................................................................................133
5.38 E1 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................135
5.38.1 Choose a Unit .........................................................................................................................................135
5.38.2 E1/T1 Mode Setup..................................................................................................................................136
5.38.3 Line Config Setup...................................................................................................................................136
5.38.3.1
5.38.3.2
5.38.3.3
5.38.4
5.38.4.1
5.38.4.2
5.38.5
5.38.6
5.38.6.1
5.38.6.2
5.38.7
5.38.7.1
5.38.7.2
5.38.8
5.38.8.1
5.38.8.2
5.38.8.3
E1 Line Coding Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 137

E1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup............................................................................................................... 138
E1 Customer Information Setup...................................................................................................................... 140
Unit Diagnostics Setup ...........................................................................................................................141

Channel Loopback Setup ................................................................................................................................ 142
Unit Diagnostics Setup.................................................................................................................................... 143
SNCP User Command ............................................................................................................................144

E1 Unit Alarm Setup ..............................................................................................................................145
E1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................................................... 146
Unit Alarm Severity Setup .............................................................................................................................. 147
Performance Setup/Clear........................................................................................................................149
Clear Performance Data .................................................................................................................................. 149
Unit Performance TCA Setup ......................................................................................................................... 150
E1 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................151

1-Hour Performance Report............................................................................................................................ 151
24-Hour Performance Report .......................................................................................................................... 152
7-Day Performance Report ............................................................................................................................. 152
5.39 T1 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................153

5.39.1 Choose a Unit .........................................................................................................................................153
5.39.2 E1/T1 Mode Setup..................................................................................................................................154
5.39.3.1
5.39.3.2
5.39.3.3
5.39.3.4
5.39.4
5.39.4.1
5.39.4.2
5.39.5
5.39.6
5.39.6.1
5.39.6.2
5.39.7
5.39.7.1
5.39.7.2
5.39.8
5.39.8.1
5.39.8.2
5.39.8.3
T1 Line Coding Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 155

T1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup............................................................................................................... 157
TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup ................................................................................................................. 158
T1 Customer Information Setup...................................................................................................................... 160

SNCP USER Command .........................................................................................................................163

T1 Unit Alarm Setup ..............................................................................................................................165
T1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................................................... 165
T1 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................170

7-Day Performance ......................................................................................................................................... 171
5.40 E3 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................172

5.40.1 Choose a Unit .........................................................................................................................................172
5.40.2 E3/T3 Mode Setup..................................................................................................................................173
5.40.3.1
5.40.3.2
5.40.4
5.40.4.1
5.40.4.2
5.40.5
5.40.6
5.40.6.1
5.40.6.2
5.40.7
5.40.7.1
5.40.7.2
5.40.8
5.40.8.1
5.40.8.2
SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup ................................................................................................................ 174

E3 Customer Information Setup...................................................................................................................... 176


E3 Unit Alarm Setup ..............................................................................................................................180
E3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................................................... 181
Performance Threshold Setup ......................................................................................................................... 185
E3 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................186

1-Hour Performance........................................................................................................................................ 186
iv
5.40.8.3
7-Day Performance Report ............................................................................................................................. 187
5.41 T3 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................188

5.41.1 Choose a Unit .........................................................................................................................................188
5.41.2 E3/T3 Mode Setup..................................................................................................................................189
5.41.3.1
5.41.3.2
5.41.3.3
5.41.3.4
5.41.4
Line Transmit Length Setup............................................................................................................................ 190

Mapping Mode Setup...................................................................................................................................... 191
SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup ................................................................................................................ 192
Customer Information Setup ........................................................................................................................... 194
5.41.4.1
5.41.4.2
5.41.5
5.41.6


T3 Unit Alarm Setup ..............................................................................................................................199
5.41.6.1
5.41.6.2
5.41.7
T3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................................................... 199

5.41.7.1
5.41.7.2
5.41.8

T3 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................204
5.41.8.1
5.41.8.2
5.41.8.3

7-Day Performance ......................................................................................................................................... 206
5.42 ETHERNET SWITCH SETUP...............................................................................................................................207

5.42.1 Unit Menu Tree ......................................................................................................................................207
5.42.2 Choosing a Trib Unit ..............................................................................................................................208
5.42.3 Mode Setup.............................................................................................................................................209
5.42.4 VCG & Link Setup.................................................................................................................................209
5.42.4.1
5.42.4.2
5.42.4.3
5.42.4.4
5.42.4.5
5.42.4.6
5.42.4.7
5.42.4.8
5.42.4.9
5.42.4.10
5.42.5
5.42.5.1
5.42.5.2
5.42.6
5.42.7
5.42.8
Payload/LCAS Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 210

Encapsulation Type Setup............................................................................................................................... 211
Encapsulation Parameter Setup....................................................................................................................... 212
Path Alarm Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 214
WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup............................................................................................................. 215
Linkdown Alarm Setup................................................................................................................................... 216
Link Config Setup........................................................................................................................................... 217
Link Failure Propagation Setup....................................................................................................................... 218
Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup.......................................................................................................................... 220
Loopback Test ........................................................................................................................................222

SNCP User Command ............................................................................................................................222
Switch Setup...........................................................................................................................................223
5.42.8.1
5.42.8.2
5.42.8.3
5.42.8.4
5.42.8.5
5.42.8.6
5.42.8.7
5.42.8.7.1
5.42.8.7.2
5.42.8.7.3
5.42.8.7.4
5.42.8.7.5
VLAN Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 223

Port Map Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 226
Port Trunk Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 228
MSTP/RSTP Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 229
IGMP Setup .................................................................................................................................................... 234
Flow Control Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 238
QoS Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 239
Class of Service Setup..................................................................................................................................... 240
TCP/UDP Port Access Control ....................................................................................................................... 243
Transmission Scheduling ................................................................................................................................ 245
Transmission WRED Setup ............................................................................................................................ 247
Rate Control Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 248
5.42.9 MAC Learning Setup .............................................................................................................................250

5.42.10
Unit Load Default and Reset ..............................................................................................................250
5.43 ETHERNET NO-SWITCH SETUP ........................................................................................................................251
5.43.1 Unit Menu Tree ......................................................................................................................................251
5.43.2 Choosing a Trib Unit ..............................................................................................................................252
5.43.3 Mode Setup.............................................................................................................................................253
5.43.4 WAN (VCG) & Link Setup....................................................................................................................253
5.43.4.1
5.43.4.2
Payload/LCAS Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 254

Encapsulation Type Setup............................................................................................................................... 255
5.43.4.3
5.43.4.4
5.43.4.5
5.43.4.6
5.43.4.7
5.43.4.8
5.43.4.9
5.43.4.10
5.43.5
5.43.5.1
5.43.5.2
5.43.6
5.43.7
5.43.8
6
Encapsulation Parameter Setup....................................................................................................................... 255

Path Alarm Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 258
WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup............................................................................................................. 259
Linkdown Alarm Setup................................................................................................................................... 260
Link Config Setup........................................................................................................................................... 260
Link Failure Propagation Setup....................................................................................................................... 261
Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup.......................................................................................................................... 262
Loopback Test ........................................................................................................................................264

Unit Load Default and Reset ..................................................................................................................265
SDH/SONET FEATURES...................................................................................................................................266
6.1
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................266
6.2
MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE AND MAPPING MODES .........................................................................................267
6.2.1
Mapping of Tributaries into VC-n..........................................................................................................267
6.2.1.1
6.2.1.2
6.2.1.3
6.2.1.4
6.2.1.5
6.2.1.6
6.2.1.7
6.2.1.8
6.2.1.9
6.2.1.10
6.2.2
6.2.3
Asynchronous mapping of 44 736 kbps .............................................................................................................. 267

Asynchronous mapping of 34 368 kbps .............................................................................................................. 268
Asynchronous mapping of 2048kbps .................................................................................................................. 268
Mapping of GFP Frames ..................................................................................................................................... 269
Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232 .................................................................................................................. 269
TM-N Physical layer ........................................................................................................................................... 270
STM-N Regenerator and Multiplex Section layer ............................................................................................... 270
VC-n/m Path layer............................................................................................................................................... 270
VC4-Xc/VC-4/VC-3 POH Implementation......................................................................................................... 271
VC-2/VC-1 POH Implementation................................................................................................................... 272
Cross-connect .........................................................................................................................................272
Concatenation schemes...........................................................................................................................272
6.2.3.1
6.2.4
Virtual concatenation .......................................................................................................................................... 272
Protection................................................................................................................................................273
6.2.4.1
6.2.4.2
6.2.5
MSP 1+1 linear.................................................................................................................................................... 273

SNC Protection.................................................................................................................................................... 273
Performance Monitoring.........................................................................................................................274
6.2.5.1
6.2.5.2
6.2.5.3
Regenerator and multiplex section performance monitoring............................................................................... 274

Path performance monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 275
Synchronization................................................................................................................................................... 275
6.3
PDH FEATURES...............................................................................................................................................277
6.3.1
E1 features..............................................................................................................................................277
6.3.1.1
6.2.1.2
6.3.2
General information ............................................................................................................................................ 277

Transparent Leased Line ..................................................................................................................................... 277
E3/T3 Features........................................................................................................................................277
6.3.2.1
6.3.2.2
6.3.2.3
General information ............................................................................................................................................ 277

E3 transparent leased line.................................................................................................................................... 277
T3 transparent leased line.................................................................................................................................... 277
6.3.3
Loop-back...............................................................................................................................................277
6.4
MANAGEMENT FEATURES ...............................................................................................................................279
6.4.1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................279
6.4.2
Management Interfaces...........................................................................................................................279
6.4.2.1
6.4.2.2
6.4.2.3
6.4.2.4
6.4.2.5
Management port................................................................................................................................................. 279

DCC channels...................................................................................................................................................... 279
Device ................................................................................................................................................................. 279
SDH..................................................................................................................................................................... 280
Tributary Module ................................................................................................................................................ 281
6.5
CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT .....................................................................................................................285
6.5.1
Backup and Restoration of Configuration Data......................................................................................285
6.5.2
Software download.................................................................................................................................285
6.5.3
Feature management...............................................................................................................................285
6.5.4
Device reset ............................................................................................................................................285
7
ETHERNET APPENDIX ....................................................................................................................................286

7.1
7.2
FLOW CONTROL...............................................................................................................................................286
TRUNK ............................................................................................................................................................286
vi
7.3
QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) ...........................................................................................................................286
7.3.1
Internal Priority Setup (Class of Service) ...............................................................................................287
7.3.1.1
7.3.1.2
7.3.1.3
7.3.1.4
7.3.2
7.3.2.1
7.3.2.2
7.3.2.3
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.5.1
7.3.6
7.3.6.1
7.3.6.2
7.3.7
7.3.7.1
7.3.7.2
Using Fixed Priority ............................................................................................................................................ 287

Using the Priority Defined in the VLAN Tag...................................................................................................... 287
Distrusted Port..................................................................................................................................................... 287
Using the Priority Defined in the TOS Field of the IP Header ............................................................................ 288
Layer 4 TCP/UDP Port Configure(TCP/UDP Port Access Control)......................................................288

Well Known Ports ............................................................................................................................................... 288
User Defined Logical Ports ................................................................................................................................. 288
User Defined Logical Port Range........................................................................................................................ 289
Transmission Queues..............................................................................................................................289
Transmission Scheduling Setup..............................................................................................................289
Strict Priority (SP) ..................................................................................................................................289
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) ........................................................................................................................... 289
Drop Precedence.....................................................................................................................................290
Drop Precedence Setup........................................................................................................................................ 290
Weighted Random Early Drop Settings............................................................................................................... 291
Rate Control ...........................................................................................................................................291

Egress Rate Control............................................................................................................................................. 291
Ingress Rate Control............................................................................................................................................ 292
7.4
ETHERNET CARD FUNCTIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS ..........................................................................................293
7.4.1
Card Functions........................................................................................................................................293
7.4.2
O9400S FE (4EoS1SW) Module............................................................................................................293
7.4.2.1
7.4.2.2
7.4.2.3
7.4.2.4
7.4.3
7.4.3.1
7.4.3.2
7.4.3.3
7.4.3.4
7.4.4
7.4.4.1
7.4.5
7.4.5.1
E- Line................................................................................................................................................................. 293
E- Lan.................................................................................................................................................................. 294
Port Map.............................................................................................................................................................. 295
Port Trunking (Line Aggregation)....................................................................................................................... 296
O9400S FE (4EoS6SW) Module............................................................................................................297

E-Line.................................................................................................................................................................. 297
E-LAN................................................................................................................................................................. 298
Port MAP ............................................................................................................................................................ 299
Port Trunking (Line Aggregation)....................................................................................................................... 300
O9400S FE (4FE4NSW) Module...........................................................................................................300

E-Line.................................................................................................................................................................. 300
O9400S (1GE4NSW) Module................................................................................................................301

E-Line.................................................................................................................................................................. 301
ALARM TRAP APPENDIX ...............................................................................................................................302

8.1
LOCAL ALARM TRAP.......................................................................................................................................302
8.2
CRITICAL ALARMACTIVE TRAP ......................................................................................................................302
8.3
CRITICAL ALARM CLEARED TRAP ..................................................................................................................303
8.4
MAJOR ALARM ACTIVE TRAP .........................................................................................................................303
8.5
MAJOR ALARM CLEARED TRAP ......................................................................................................................304
8.6
MINOR ALARM ACTIVE TRAP .........................................................................................................................304
8.7
MINOR ALARM CLEARED TRAP ......................................................................................................................305
8.8
INFO ACTIVE TRAP ..........................................................................................................................................305
8.9
INFO CLEARED TRAP .......................................................................................................................................306
8.9.1
alarmQueueUnit .....................................................................................................................................306
8.9.2
alarmQueueCardModel: Card model type..............................................................................................306
8.9.3
alarmQueuePortNum: Port index ...........................................................................................................307
8.9.4
alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel...........................................................................................................307
8.9.5
alarmQueueAlmNum 0 ~ 30: System alarm...........................................................................................307
8.9.6
alarmQueueAlmNum 30 ~ 74: SDH alarm ............................................................................................308
8.9.7
alarmQueueAlmNum 130 ~ 234: SONET alarm....................................................................................309
8.9.8
alarmQueueAlmNum 250 ~ 252: E1/T1 alarm ......................................................................................310
8.9.9
alarmQueueAlmNum 300 ~ 303: Ethernet alarm...................................................................................310
8.9.10 alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4/ AU3 type in SDH, STS3-C or STS-1 type in SONET................310
8.9.11 alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type..................................................................................................310
8.9.12 alarmQueueAUG1STS3: The number of STM1 ....................................................................................311
8.9.13 alarmQueueVC3STS1: The number of STS1.........................................................................................311
8.9.14 alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2 .......................................................................................311
8.9.15 alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x.........................................................................................311
GLOSSARY..........................................................................................................................................................312
vii
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1-1 O9400S............................................................................................................................................................1
FIGURE 1-2 APPLICATION ILLUSTRATION............................................................................................................................2
FIGURE 2-1 POWER CONNECTION .......................................................................................................................................7
FIGURE 2-2 GROUND SCREW LOCATION .............................................................................................................................8
FIGURE 2-3 INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM...........................................................................................................................9
FIGURE 3-1 TIMING INPUTS FOR THE O9400S ...................................................................................................................14
FIGURE 3-2 LOOP SCSI CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................17
FIGURE 3-3 16 E1 BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................................................................................18
FIGURE 3-4 LOOP RF CONNECTOR ....................................................................................................................................19
FIGURE 3-5 E3/DS3 BLOCK DIAGRAM ..............................................................................................................................20
FIGURE 3-6 RS232X2 BLOCK DIAGRAM ...........................................................................................................................22
FIGURE 3-7 FAST ETHERNET INTERFACE WITH SWITCH ....................................................................................................23
FIGURE 3-8 FAST ETHERNET (FE) WITH SWITCH BLOCK DIAGRAM ..................................................................................23
FIGURE 3-9 GIGA ETHERNET INTERFACE WITH SWITCH ....................................................................................................24
FIGURE 3-10 GIGABIT ETHERNET (GBE) WITH SWITCH BLOCK DIAGRAM ........................................................................24
FIGURE 3-11 FAST ETHERNET INTERFACE WITHOUT SWITCH............................................................................................25
FIGURE 3-12 FAST ETHERNET (FE) WITHOUT SWITCH BLOCK DIAGRAM .........................................................................25
FIGURE 3-13 GIGA ETHERNET INTERFACE WITHOUT SWITCH ...........................................................................................26
FIGURE 3-14 GIGABIT ETHERNET (GBE) WITHOUT SWITCH BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................26
FIGURE 5-1 VT-100 MAIN MENU TREE OVERVIEW ..........................................................................................................33
FIGURE 5-2 VT-100 E1 MENU TREE LOG AND MISC SECTIONS ...................................................................................34
FIGURE 5-3 VT-100 T1 MENU TREE LOG AND MISC SECTIONS ...................................................................................35
FIGURE 5-4 VT-100 E3 MENU TREE LOG AND MISC SECTIONS ...................................................................................36
FIGURE 5-5 VT-100 T3 MENU TREE LOG AND MISC SECTIONS ...................................................................................37
FIGURE 5-6 VT-100 MENU TREE DISPLAY SECTION ...................................................................................................38
FIGURE 5-7 VT-100 MENU TREE SETUP SECTION ........................................................................................................39
FIGURE 5-8 DCC(E) + DCC(W) .......................................................................................................................................61
FIGURE 5-9 DCC(E) + INBAND .........................................................................................................................................61
FIGURE 5-10 DCC(W) + INBAND ......................................................................................................................................62
FIGURE 5-11 O9400S LOOPBACK DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................................100
FIGURE 5-12 ETHERNET INTERFACE CARD WITH SWITCH VT-100 MENU TREE .............................................................207
FIGURE 5-13 ETHERNET INTERFACE CARD WITHOUT SWITCH VT-100 MENU TREE .......................................................251
FIGURE 6-1 SONET LAYER TERMINOLOGY ....................................................................................................................266
FIGURE 6-2 SDH LAYER TERMINOLOGY.........................................................................................................................266
FIGURE 6-3 MULTIPLEXING/MAPPING STRUCTURE ADAPTED FROM ITU-T G.707/Y.1322.............................................267
FIGURE 6-4 ASYNCHRONOUS MAPPING OF 44 736 KBPS TRIBUTARY INTO VC-3 ............................................................267
FIGURE 6-5 ASYNCHRONOUS MAPPING OF 34 368 KBPS TRIBUTARY INTO VC-3 ............................................................268
FIGURE 6-6 ASYNCHRONOUS MAPPING OF 2048KBPS INTO VC-12 .................................................................................268
FIGURE 6-7 MAPPING OF GFP FRAMES INTO C-N ............................................................................................................269
FIGURE 6-8 LOOP PROPRIETARY MAPPING OF RS232 .....................................................................................................269
FIGURE 6-9 STM-N SECTION OVERHEAD (SOH) ............................................................................................................270
FIGURE 6-10 VC-4 POH .................................................................................................................................................271
FIGURE 6-11 VC-12 POH ...............................................................................................................................................272
FIGURE 6-12 PROTECTION SCHEMES FOR O9400S...........................................................................................................273
FIGURE 6-13 O9400S LOOPBACK DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................................278
FIGURE 6-14 ALARM SUPPRESSION SEQUENCE ...............................................................................................................284
FIGURE 7-1 RULE FOR DETERMINING TRANSMISSION CLASS ..........................................................................................287
FIGURE 7-2 FE (4EOS1SW) MODULE E-LINE .................................................................................................................294
FIGURE 7-3 FE (4EOS1SW) MODULE E-LAN .................................................................................................................294
FIGURE 7-4 FE (4EOS1SW) MODULE PORT MAP ...........................................................................................................295
FIGURE 7-5 FE (4EOS1SW) MODULE PORT TRUNKING ..................................................................................................296
FIGURE 7-6 FE (4EOS6SW) MODULE E-LINE .................................................................................................................297
FIGURE 7-7 FE (4EOS6SW) MODULE E-LAN ................................................................................................................298
FIGURE 7-8 FE (4EOS6SW) MODULE PORT MAP ...........................................................................................................299
FIGURE 7-9 FE (4EOS6SW) MODULE PORT TRUNKING ..................................................................................................300
FIGURE 7-10 FE (4FE4NSW) MODULE ..........................................................................................................................300
FIGURE 7-11 1GE4NSW MODULE ..................................................................................................................................301
viii
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 2-1 DB9 CONSOLE PORT PINOUT TABLE .................................................................................................................9
TABLE 3-1 PIN-OUT FOR -48 DC CONNECTOR...................................................................................................................10
TABLE 3-2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR DC COMPLIANCE.......................................................................................10
TABLE 3-3 POWER SUPPLY COMPLIANCE..........................................................................................................................10
TABLE 3-4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR AC ............................................................................................................11
TABLE 3-5 AC COMPLIANCE.............................................................................................................................................11
TABLE 3-6 PIN-OUT FOR ALARM INPUT CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................12
TABLE 3-7 PIN-OUT FOR ALARM OUTPUT CONNECTOR ....................................................................................................12
TABLE 3-8 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS AT ALARM INPUT .............................................................................................12
TABLE 3-9 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS AT ALARM OUTPUT ..........................................................................................13
TABLE 3-10 PIN-OUT FOR VT-100 CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................13
TABLE 3-11 RS-232 INTERFACE COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................................13
TABLE 3-12 PIN-OUT FOR SYNCHRONIZATION PORT .........................................................................................................15
TABLE 3-13 SYNCHRONIZATION INTERFACE COMPLIANCE ...............................................................................................15
TABLE 3-14 PIN-OUT FOR SCSI CONNECTOR ...............................................................................................................16
TABLE 3-15 16 E1 INTERFACE COMPLIANCE .....................................................................................................................18
TABLE 3-16 E3/DS3 INTERFACE COMPLIANCE .................................................................................................................19
TABLE 3-17 PIN-OUT FOR 2*RS232 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................21
TABLE 3-18 RS232 INTERFACE COMPLIANCE ...................................................................................................................21
TABLE 3-19 ETHERNET SWITCH POWER CONSUMPTION ...................................................................................................26
TABLE 3-20 RJ-45 PINOUT FOR ETHERNET PORT ..............................................................................................................27
TABLE 4-1 LED INDICATION FOR MAIN UNIT ...................................................................................................................29
TABLE 4-2 LED INDICATION FOR SYSTEM MODE .............................................................................................................29
TABLE 4-3 LED INDICATIONS FOR E1/T1, E3/T3, ETHERNET CARDS ...............................................................................30
TABLE 5-1 SYSTEM SETUP SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................45
TABLE 5-2 TIMING SOURCE SETTING OPTIONS .................................................................................................................48
TABLE 5-3 BRIDGE AND RSTP INFO. SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................53
TABLE 5-4 G AT E WA Y N E T W OR K E L E M EN T S ET T I NG O P TI O NS 1 .........................................................................56
TABLE 5-5 G AT E WA Y N E T W OR K E L E M EN T S ET T I NG O P TI O NS 2 .........................................................................56
TABLE 5-6 REMOTE MANAGEMENT SETUP OPTIONS ........................................................................................................61
TABLE 5-7 SNTP SETTING OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................64
TABLE 5-8 RS232 CONFIG SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................66
TABLE 5-9 HAND-WAVING LED SETTING OPTIONS ..........................................................................................................70
TABLE 5-10 SSH SERTTINGS ............................................................................................................................................75
TABLE 5-11 SDH/SONET MODE SETTINGS .....................................................................................................................77
TABLE 5-12 SDH/SONET LINE SIDE SETTINGS ...............................................................................................................77
TABLE 5-13 SDH/SONET PROTECTION SETTING OPTIONS ..............................................................................................80
TABLE 5-14 ALS/APSD SETTING OPTIONS ......................................................................................................................83
TABLE 5-15 SDH/SONET GRANULARITY SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................85
TABLE 5-16 XC/TSA SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................................................88
TABLE 5-17 XC/TSA CREATE SETUP SETTING OPTIONS ..................................................................................................89
TABLE 5-18 LCAS STATUS ABBREVIATIONS AND REMARK .............................................................................................91
TABLE 5-19 XC/TSA DELETE SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................93
TABLE 5-20 SDH/SONET OVERHEAD LINE SIDE SETTING OPTIONS ...............................................................................97
TABLE 5-21 ADDITIONAL SDH/SONET OVERHEAD SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................97
TABLE 5-22 HO-PATH/STS-PATH LINE SIDE SETTING OPTIONS .......................................................................................98
TABLE 5-23 ADDITIONAL HO-PATH/STS-PATH OVERHEAD SETTING OPTIONS ................................................................98
TABLE 5-24 MSP COMMAND SETTINGS ..........................................................................................................................104
TABLE 5-25 SYSTEM ALARM SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................108
TABLE 5-26 SDH-LINE/SONET-LINE ALARM MASK/RELAY SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................109
TABLE 5-27 HO-PATH/STS-PATH ALARM MASK/RELAY SETTING OPTIONS ..................................................................110
TABLE 5-28 LO-PATH/VT-PATH ALARM MASK/RELAY SETTING OPTIONS ....................................................................111
TABLE 5-29 SD/SF THRESHOLD SETTINGS .....................................................................................................................113
TABLE 5-30 THRESHOLD TO BIT ERROR RATE CONVERSION TABLE...............................................................................113
TABLE 5-31 EXTERNAL ALARM SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................................114
TABLE 5-32 LOW-ORDER PATH OVERHEAD SETTINGS ...................................................................................................139
TABLE 5-33 SNCP COMMAND SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................145
TABLE 5-34 U NI T P ERF OR MA NC E TCA S E TT I NG S .................................................................................................150
ix
TABLE 5-35 LOW-ORDER PATH OVERHEAD SETTINGS ...................................................................................................157

TABLE 5-38 SDH/SONET PATH OVERHEAD SETTINGS ..................................................................................................175
TABLE 5-40 P ERF . T HR E SH O LD C R O S S A LA R M S E T TI NG S ...................................................................................185
TABLE 5-41 SDH/SONET P AT H O V ER H EA D S E T T IN G O P T I ON S ........................................................................193
TABLE 5-44 MODE SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................209
TABLE 5-45 MODE SUPPORT TABLE ...............................................................................................................................209
TABLE 5-46 PAYLOAD/LCAS SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................211
TABLE 5-47 ENCAPSULATION TYPE SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................211
TABLE 5-48 ENCAPSULATION PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS ........................................................................................212
TABLE 5-49 GFP PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................................212
TABLE 5-50 LAPS PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................................213
TABLE 5-51 BCP PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................................214
TABLE 5-52 PATH ALARM SETTING OPTIONS 1...............................................................................................................214
TABLE 5-53 PATH ALARM SETTING OPTIONS 2...............................................................................................................215
TABLE 5-54 WAN (VCG) ALARM THRESHOLD SETTING OPTIONS .................................................................................216
TABLE 5-55 LINKDOWN ALARM SETTING OPTIONS ........................................................................................................217
TABLE 5-56 LINK CONFIG SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH...................................................................217
TABLE 5-57 LINK FAILURE PROPAGATION SETTING OPTIONS.........................................................................................218
TABLE 5-58 LINK FAULT PROPAGATIONE-LINE MODE ...............................................................................................219
TABLE 5-59 LINK FAULT PROPAGATIONPORTMAP/TRUNK MODE ..............................................................................219
TABLE 5-60 INTER-FRAME GAP (IFG) SETTING OPTIONS ..............................................................................................220
TABLE 5-61 PERFORMANCE THRESHOLD SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................221
TABLE 5-62 LOOPBACK TEST SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................222
TABLE 5-63 SNCP SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................222
TABLE 5-64 VLAN TAG PROTOCOL ID SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................224
TABLE 5-65 VLAN TAG PROTOCOL ID SETTING OPTIONS FOR SCREEN 1 ......................................................................224
TABLE 5-66 VLAN TAG PROTOCOL ID SETTING OPTIONS FOR SCREEN 2 ......................................................................225
TABLE 5-67 VLAN PORT ASSOCIATION ID SETTING OPTIONS FOR SCREEN 1................................................................225
TABLE 5-68 VLAN PORT ASSOCIATION ID SETTING OPTIONS FOR SCREEN 2................................................................226
TABLE 5-69 WAN PORT MAP SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................227
TABLE 5-70 LAN PORT MAP SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................227
TABLE 5-71 PORT TRUNK SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ...................................................................228
TABLE 5-72 MSTP REGION/CIST SETUP ........................................................................................................................230
TABLE 5-73 SPANTREE PORT ENABLE SETTING OPTIONS ...............................................................................................230
TABLE 5-74 MSTP INSTANCE/VLAN SETTING OPTIONS #1 ............................................................................................231
TABLE 5-75 MSTP INSTANCE/PRIORITY SETTNG OPTIONS .............................................................................................232
TABLE 5-76 MST INSTANCE SETTING OPTIONS ..............................................................................................................232
TABLE 5-77 MSTP PORT SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................233
TABLE 5-78 RSTP PORT SETTING OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................233
TABLE 5-79 RSTP BRIDGE SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH .................................................................234
TABLE 5-80 IGMP SNOOPING SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................235
TABLE 5-81 IGMP ROUTER PORT SETTING OPTIONS......................................................................................................236
TABLE 5-82 IP MULTICAST RANGE SETTING OPTIONS ...................................................................................................237
TABLE 5-83 IGMP CROSS VLAN SETTING OPTIONS .....................................................................................................237
TABLE 5-84 IGMP CROSS VLAN SETTING OPTIONS ....................................................................................................238
TABLE 5-85 FLOW CONTROL SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ..............................................................239
TABLE 5-86 PRIORITY MODE SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ..............................................................240
TABLE 5-87 FIXED PRIORITY SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ..............................................................241
TABLE 5-88 VLAN TAG PRIORITY SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH .....................................................242
TABLE 5-89 TOS FIELD PRIORITY SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH ......................................................242
TABLE 5-90 DISTRUSTED PORT SETTING OPTIONS..........................................................................................................243
TABLE 5-91 USER DEFINE PORT PRIORITY SETTING OPTIONS ........................................................................................244
TABLE 5-92 CP/UDP PORT RANGE PRIORITY SETTINGS.................................................................................................245
TABLE 5-93 SCHEDULING ALGORITHM SETTING OPTIONS ..............................................................................................246
TABLE 5-94 WFQ WEIGHT SETUP SETTING OPTIONS .....................................................................................................247
TABLE 5-95 TRANSMISSION WRED SETTING OPTIONS ..................................................................................................248
TABLE 5-96 RATE CTRL/INGRESS WRED SETTING OPTIONS..........................................................................................248

TABLE 5-97 PORT BITRATE SETTING OPTIONS ................................................................................................................249
TABLE 5-98 MAC LEARNING SETTING OPTIONS ............................................................................................................250
TABLE 5-99 MODE SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................253
TABLE 5-100 MODE SUPPORT TABLE .............................................................................................................................253
TABLE 5-101 PAYLOAD/LCAS SETTING OPTIONS ..........................................................................................................254
TABLE 5-102 ENCAPSULATION TYPE SETTING OPTIONS .................................................................................................255
TABLE 5-103 ENCAPSULATION PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS ......................................................................................255
TABLE 5-104 GFP PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................................256
TABLE 5-105 LAPS PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS .......................................................................................................256
TABLE 5-106 BCP PARAMETER SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................................257
TABLE 5-107 PATH ALARM SETTING OPTIONS 1.............................................................................................................258
TABLE 5-108 PATH ALARM SETTING OPTIONS 2.............................................................................................................259
TABLE 5-109 WAN (VCG) ALARM THRESHOLD SETTING OPTIONS ...............................................................................259
TABLE 5-110 LINKDOWN ALARM SETTING OPTIONS ......................................................................................................260
TABLE 5-111 LINK CONFIG SETTING OPTIONS FOR ETHERNET WITH SWITCH.................................................................261
TABLE 5-112 LINK FAILURE PROPAGATION SETTING OPTIONS.......................................................................................262
TABLE 5-113 LINK FAULT PROPAGATIONE-LINE MODE .............................................................................................262
TABLE 5-114 INTER-FRAME GAP (IFG) SETTING OPTIONS .............................................................................................263
TABLE 5-115 PERFORMANCE THRESHOLD SETTING OPTIONS .........................................................................................264
TABLE 5-116 LOOPBACK TEST SETTING OPTIONS ..........................................................................................................265
TABLE 5-117 LOOPBACKTEST SETTING OPTIONS ...........................................................................................................265
TABLE 6-1 O9400S DEVICE (SYSTEM) ALARMS .............................................................................................................279
TABLE 6-2 SDH ALARMS................................................................................................................................................280
TABLE 6-3 MISCELLANEOUS ALARMS ............................................................................................................................281
TABLE 6-4 ALARM PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................................................281
TABLE 6-5 ALARM SUPPRESSION TABLE FOR SDH RELATED ITEMS ..............................................................................283
TABLE 6-6 ALARM SUPPRESSION TABLE FOR PDH (TRIBUTARY) ALARMS.....................................................................283
TABLE 7-1 WELL-KNOWN PORT NUMBER VERSUS SERVICE TYPE ..................................................................................288
TABLE 7-2 WRED LOGIC BEHAVIOUR ...........................................................................................................................291
TABLE 7-3 O9400S ETHERNET CARD FUNCTION TABLE ................................................................................................293
TABLE 8-1 ALARMQUEUEUNIT: UNIT INDEX ..................................................................................................................306
TABLE 8-2 ALARM QUEUE CARD MODEL: CARD MODEL TYPE........................................................................................306
TABLE 8-3 ALARMQUEUEPORTNUM: PORT INDEX ..........................................................................................................307
TABLE 8-4 ALARMQUEUEVCCHAN: VC CHANNEL .........................................................................................................307
TABLE 8-5 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 0 ~ 30: SYSTEM ALARM ..........................................................................................307
TABLE 8-6 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 30 ~ 74: SDH ALARM .............................................................................................308
TABLE 8-7 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 130 ~ 234: SONET ALARM ....................................................................................309
TABLE 8-8 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 220 ~ 252:E1/T1 ALARM ........................................................................................310
TABLE 8-9 ALARMQUEUEALMNUM 300 ~ 303:ETHERNET ALARM .................................................................................310
TABLE 8-10 ALARMQUEUEVC43STS31TYPE: AU4 /AU3 TYPE IN SDH, STS-3C OR.....................................................310
TABLE 8-11 ALARMQUEUETU1XVTXTYPE: TU1X TYPE ................................................................................................310
TABLE 8-12 ALARMQUEUEAUG1STS3: THE NUMBER OF STM1 ...................................................................................311
TABLE 8-13 ALARMQUEUEVC3STS1: THE NUMBER OF STS1........................................................................................311
TABLE 8-14 ALARMQUEUETUG2VTG: THE NUMBER OF TUG2 .....................................................................................311
TABLE 8-15 ALARMQUEUETU1XVTX: THE NUMBER OF TU1X.......................................................................................311
xi
D
GB
F
ES
Bitte fhren Sie das Gert am Ende seinerLewbensdauer den zue Verfgung
stehended Rckgabeund Sammelsystemen zu.
At the end of the product's useful life, please dispose of it at appropriate collection
points provided in your country
Une fois le produit en fin devie, veuillez le dposer dans un point de recyclage
appropri.
Para preservar el medio ambiente, al final dela vida til de su producto, depositelo
en los laguares destinado aello de acuerdo con la legislacin vigente.
No final de vida til do producto, por favor coloque no ponto de recolha apropriado.
Onde tutelare l'ambiente, non buttate l'apparecchio trai i normali rifiuti al termine
della sua vita utile, ma portatelo presso i punti do taccolta specifici per questi rifiuti
previsti dalla normativa vigente.
NL
Wij raden u aan het apparant aan het einde van zijn nuttige levensduur, niet bij hey
gewone huisafval te deponeren, maar op de dearvoor bestemde adressen.
DK
Nr produktet er udtjent, bor det brtskaffes via de s rlige indsamlingssteder i

landet.
Ved slutten av produktets levetid br det avhendes p en kommunal miljstasjon

eller leveres til en elektroforhandler.
Lmna vnligen in produkten p lmplig tervinningsstation nr den r frbrukad.
FIN
Hvit tuote kytin pttyess viemll se asianmukaiseen keryspisteeseen.
PL
Gdy produkt nie nadaje sie juz do dalszego uzytku, nalezy zostawic go w jednym ze
specjalnych punktw zajmujacych sie zbirka zuzytych producktw w wybranych
miejscach na terenie kraju.
CZ
Po skonen jeho ivotnosti odlote prosm vrobek na pislunm sbrnm mst

zzenm dle pedpis ve va zemi.
SK
Po skonen jeho ivotnosti odovzdajte prosm zariadenie na prslunom zbernom

mieste poda platnch miestnych predpisov a noriem.
SLO
Ko se izdelku iztee ivljenska doba, ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto oziroma

ga odvrzite v skladu z veljavnimi predpisi.
GR
PRC
xii
CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1
Description
Loop-O9400S STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) is an economical, compact, front access ADM. The 1U

shelf is designed to add & drop up to: forty-eight E1/T1 Tributaries, three E3/T3 Tributary and
four 10/100M Ethernet Tributaries.
With up to 2 aggregate optical/electrical STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) interfaces, the O9400S can offer
the service provider a versatile protection scheme including SNCP, and MSP (1+1) protection
for both ring and linear Network topology.
All interfaces are fully compliant with the relevant ETSI standards and ITU recommendations.
The O9400S provides powerful Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning
(OAM&P) functionality, including fault management, performance monitoring, configuration
management, and network security management. Through console port, LAN port, and DCC
channel, the OAM&P can be achieved both locally and remotely via SNMP or menu-driven
interfaces.
The O9400S provides a complete set of operation interfaces that are consistent with the
Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) concept (ITU Recommendation M.30,G.784)
for SDH Network Element/Operations System (NE/OS), NE/NE, and NE/Craft
communications. User can easily operate O9400S locally or remotely for centralized
management.
The O9400S supports Ethernet Order Wire (EOW) using VoIP technology.
Figure 1-1 O9400S

Applications
SDH/SONET
backbone
LOOP
INMS
STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
O9400R
0 1
0
1
O9400R
E3/T3
E1/T1
Ethernet
0 1
1
0
O9400S
0
1
E3/T3
E1/T1
Ethernet
STM-1
STM-4
0
1
O9400 S
O9400S
O9400R
STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
Ring
E3/T3
E1/T1
Ethernet
0 1
1
0
O9100
01
0
1
O9100
O9400S
01
0
1
0 1
1
0
0 1
0
1
0 1
1
0
O9400S
0 1
0
1
10/100M
Ethernet
Ethernet
Switch
E1/T1
AM3440
10/100M
Ethernet
xDSL
IP-DSLAM
E1 /T1
AM3420
E 1/T1
E1 /T1
AM 3440
E1/T1
E 3/T3
3/D S3
V4200-9
E 1/T1
V4200-28
E3/T3
V4200-28
V4200-9
Figure 1-2 Application Illustration
C 5500
E3/T3
C5500
E3/ T3
E1/ T1
Ethernet
1.2
Specifications
Aggregate Lines - Daughter Board SFP Module Characteristics

SFP
Optical
Module
MHATW
MHBTW
PHB3W
PHB5W
PHCUW
PHCXW
PHB3D
PHB5D
PHC8D
PHCUD
PHCXD
PHCRD
PHCYD
PHCZD
PHD2W
PHE2W
PHD4W
PHE4W
PHD6W
PHE6W
PHD8W
PHE8W
PHQ8W
PHR8W
PHQXW
PHRXW
PHQRW
PHRRW
PHQYW
PHRYW
SFP
Electrical
Module
EHNAC
SFP
Optical
Module
PKB1W
PJB2W
PJB5W
PJC8W
PJB2D
PJB4D
PJB5D
PJC8D
PJCXW
PJCXD
PJCRD
PJCYD
PJD2W
PJE2W
PJD4W
PJE4W
PJD6W
PJE6W
Direction
Data Rate
Wavelength(nm)
Connector
Distance
Dual uni-directional fiber

Single bi-directional fiber
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
155M
850nm
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1550nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm
Tx 1570 nm/Rx 1490 nm
Tx 1590 nm/Rx 1510 nm
Tx 1590 nm/Rx 1510 nm
Tx 1590 nm/Rx 1510 nm
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
2 Km
2 Km
30 Km
50 Km
100 Km
120 Km
30 Km
50 Km
80 Km
100 Km
120 Km
160 Km
200 Km
240 Km
10~20 Km
10~20 Km
40 Km
40 Km
60 Km
60 Km
80 Km
80 Km
80 Km
80 Km
120 Km
120 Km
160 Km
160 Km
200 Km
200 Km
Direction
Data Rate
Wavelength(nm)
Connector
Distance
Dual uni-directional
155M
n.a.
RF connector
1.0/2.3 (75-ohm
impedance)
Direction
Data Rate
Wavelength(nm)
Connector
Distance

622M~1.2G
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1310nm
1310nm
1310nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
1550nm
Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC without DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
10 Km
15~20 Km
50 Km
80 Km
15~20 Km
40 Km
50 Km
80 Km
120 Km
120 Km
160 Km
200 Km
20 Km
20 Km
40 Km
40 Km
60 Km
60 Km
100 m

PJQ8W
PJR8W
PJQXW
PJRXW
PJD2D
PJE2D
PJD4D
PJE4D
PJD6D
PJE6D

155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
155~622M
Max. Number of Cross-connect Modules

2 STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) aggregate lines
Max. Number of Tributary Modules
48 E1/T1 tributaries
2 E3/T3 tributaries
2 GbE tributaries
8 FE tributaries
Tributary Modules
E1 Interface
Line Rate
2.048 M bps 50 ppm
Tx 1510 nm/Rx 1590 nm

Tx 1590 nm/Rx 1510 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm
80 Km
80 Km
120 Km
120 Km
20 Km
20 Km
40 Km
40 Km
60 Km
60 Km
AMI/HDB3
ITU G.703
ITU G.703
Jitter
Framing
Impedance
Connector
ETS 300 689 Sec.4.2.1.2 ITU

G.703
ITU G.823
Unframed
75 ohm coax/120 ohm twisted pair
One SCSI-II 68-pin
1.544 M bps 32 ppm

AMI/B8ZS
DSX-1 0dB to 6dB w/ALBO
DSX-1 w/short haul (0-133,
133-266,266-399, 399-533,
533-655 feet)
Output Mask
Jitter
Framing
Impedance
Connector
Bellcore GR-499-core
ITU G.824
Unframed
100 ohm
One SCSI-II 68-pin
E3 Interface
Line Rate
34.368 M bps 20ppm
Output Mask
Line Code
Input Signal
Output Signal
HDB3
ITU G.703
ITU G.703
Jitter
Framing
Connector
ETS 300 689 Sec.4.2.1.2 ITU

G.703
ITU G.823
Unframed
RF connector 1.0/2.3 (75-ohm
impedance)
75 ohm coax
Line Code
Input Signal
Output Signal
T1 Interface
Line Rate
Line Code
Input Signal
Output Signal
Output Mask
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC without DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
LC with DDM
Impedance
T3 Interface
Line Rate
Line Code
Input Signal
Output Signal
44.736 M bps 20ppm

B3ZS
ITU G.703
ITU G.703
RS232 Interface
Rate
up to 19.2K bps,
Asynchronous
Fast Ethernet (FE) interface
Line Rate
10/100M bps
Layer2
Protocol
RSTP (802.1W),
VLAN (802.1Q, 802.1P)
Flow Control (802.3X)
MSTP (802.1S)
Output Mask
Jitter
Framing
Connector
Impedance
Bellcore GR-499-core
ITU G.824
Unframed
RF connector 1.0/2.3 (75-ohm
impedance)
75 ohm coax
Connector
Two ports in one DB9, female
Mapping
n x VC12, n x VC11, n x VC3 or

n x VC4
RJ45
Connector
IGMP Snooping (RFC2236)

QoS (802.1p)
Process
Protocol
VCAT, GFP(G.7041), LAPS,

LCAS(G.7042), BCP, and
non-LCAS
Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) interface

Line Rate
10/100/1000Mbps
(1GE4NSW only supports
1000Mbps)
Layer2
RSTP (802.1W),
Protocol
VLAN (802.1Q, 802.1P)
Flow Control (802.3X)
MSTP (802.1S)
IGMP Snooping (RFC2236)
QoS (802.1p)
Process
VCAT, GFP(G.7041), LAPS,
Protocol
LCAS(G.7042), BCP,and
non-LCAS
System Clock
Clock Source
Management
LEDs
Console port
Mapping
n x VC12, n x VC11, n x VC3 or

n x VC4
Connector
RJ45
Internal clock
2 aggregate lines clocks (East STM-1/4 (OC-3/12), West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12))
3 tributary clocks
1 external input and output clock (2.048 MHz of ITU-T G.703 or E1 for STM-1/4, T1
for OC-3/12)
Multi-color LEDs
Electrical: RS232
Connector: DB9S (female, DCE)
Protocol: Menu driven VT-100
Telnet
SNMP
SNMPv1 (RFC1213)
Inband interface Using 1 E1
Outband
Using DCC channel, user selectable 3, 9 or 12 channels
interface
Diagnostics
Mainboard
Loopback Test
BERT Test
Direction: to optical lines, to tributary lines

Optical interface
Direction: to optical lines
TE1 card
Loopback Test
BERT Test

TE1 interface
TE3 card
Loopback Test
BERT Test

TE3 interface
Performance Monitor
Performance
Performance Parameters: Error Block (EB), Background Block Error (BBE), Error
Reports
Second (ES), Burst Error Second (BES), Severe Error Second (SES), Unavailable
Second (UAS)
Alarm History
System Alarm
Alarm Cut Off, Power Loss, TS Sync Loss, SNCP Switch,

MSP Switch, Login/Logout, FOM Equip/Unequip, SFP Tx
Fail, SFP Rx Fail, SFP Temperature
SDH/SONET
Line Alarm
SDH
Line
PI-LOS, RS-LOF, RS-TIM, RS-BIP

UAS, MS-SD, MS-SF, MS-AIS, MSRDI, MS-BIP UAS, MS-REI UAS
SONET
Ho-Path
AU-LOP, AU-AIS, HP-SD, HP-SF, HPTIM, HP-UNEQ, HP-PLM, HP-RDI-S,

HP-RDI-C, HP-RDI-P, HP-BIP UAS,
HP-REI UAS, LOM
Lo-Path
TU-LOP, TU-AIS, LP-SD, LP-SF
Line
LOS-PI, LOF-S, TIM-S, BIP-S UAS,

SD-L , SF-L , IS-L , RDI-L , BIP-L UAS,
REI-L UAS
STS-Path LOP-P, AIS-P, SD-P, SF-P, TIM-P,

UNEQ-P, PLM-P, RDI-S-P, RDI-C-P,
RDI-P-P, BIP-P UAS, REI-P UAS,
LOM
Alarm Queue
VT-Path LOP-V, AIS-V, SD-V, SF-V

Contains up to 200 alarm records of latest alarm types, alarm severity, date and
time.
Power
AC module
DC module
AC and DC coexistent module
Power Consumption
Physical and Environmental

Dimensions for 1u
Temperature
Humidity
Mounting
Standards Compliance
ITU
100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz

-48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc)
100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz, -36 to -75 Vdc
DC: Max 39.6 W
AC: Max 43.9 W
DC & AC: Max 47.1 W
432 x 44x 240 mm. (W x H x D)

0 to 50C
0-95%RH (non-condensing)
19 inch rack mountable, and wall mountable
G.664, G.707, G.7041, G.7042, G.775, G.783, G.806, G.823,

G.747, X.86
ANSI
T1.105, T1.107
IEEE
802.1q (VLAN), 802.1w (RSTP), 802.1s (MSTP), 802.1ad (stack

VLAN),
802.3x (flow control), 802.1p (QoS)
IETF
Certification
EMC
EMI
Safety
RFC2236 (IGMP Snooping), RFC1213 (SNMPv1)
EN55024
EN55022 Class A, FCC Part 15 Class A, EN55024
EN60950-1, IEC60950-1
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
2 INSTALLATION
2.1
Site Preparation
Ensure that your installation site conforms to all environmental and structural regulations. A
power supply must be available that conforms to the O9400S power requirements. It is
recommended that a minimum bay access of 500mm be provided.
2.2
Mechanical Installation
Wear a grounding wrist strap while installing the Loop equipment. Familiarize yourself
with the instructions in this manual before commencing any work.
2.2.1 Installation Overview
The O9400S will fit in 485 mm (19-in.) equipment racks, and can be adapted for 600 mm ETSI
(23.6-in.) racks. The racks must be accessible from the front and rear for equipment
installation. You must allow at least 500mmm of space for this.
2.2.2 Power
The O9400S can be powered using 100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz or -48 Vdc
(-36 to -75 Vdc). The power connection is illustrated in Figure 2-1, below.
Figure 2-1 Power Connection
2.2.3 Chassis Grounding

The chassis is grounded when rack mounted. However, if extra grounding protection for rack
mounted units is desired, a dedicated chassis ground screw and lock washer is provided. The
chassis ground screw for the O9400S is located in the right hand corner of the front panel.
Figure 2-2 Ground Screw Location
y
y
y
y
When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw, please follow these
instructions.
Use copper grounding conductors of 18 AWG
Conductors should not be of dissimilar metals.
The bare conductors should be coated with anti-oxidant before crimp connections are
made.
Any unplated connection surfaces, connectors, braided strap and bus bars must be
bought to a bright finish and coated with anti-oxidant before connections are made.
2.2.4 Power Connection

The power connection on your unit will be one of the following:
Single AC plug-in power supply module (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz) with
three-pronged head.
Single DC plug-in power supply module -48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc) with three-pin block
Fixed AC/DC power supply (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz) / -48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc) with
three-pronged head.and three-pin block
The power switch should be in the OFF position while you connect the power source.
Caution: Do not (under any circumstances) connect the O9400S-1US4 device to
a power source that is inconsistent with the power rating labeled on the
rear of the device. Do not (under any circumstances) remove the power
module from the O9400S-1US4 device while it is connected to a live
power source. Disconnect the module from the power source before
removing it from the O9400S-1US4 device.
2.2.5 Fiber Optic Line Connections

To install fiber-optic cables in the O9400S, connect a fiber cable with SC or SFP type
connectors to the transmit and receive ports of the transmission system. It is a good idea
to label the transmit and receive fibers at each end of the fiber span to avoid confusion
with cables that are similar in appearance.
2.2.6 Console Port

The RS232 interface for O9400S is provided via a DB-9 connector, with the following
pin-out:
Table 2-1 DB9 Console Port Pinout Table
DB9 Console Port Pinout Table
Pin
Signal
1
DCD
2
TXD
3
RXD
4
NC
5
GND
6
DSR
7
NC
8
CTS
9
NC
2.2.7 Main Module

The main module is optical aggregate STM-1/4. Please refer to Section 1.3, (Specifications)
for more information. Note: The term STM-1 also refers to OC-3.
.
2.2.8 Tributary Modules
Available tributary modules include E1, T1, T3, E3 and Ethernet. Please refer to Section 1.3,
(Specifications) for more information.
2.2.9 Interfaces
The O9400S interface block diagram is shown in Figure 2-3, below.
STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
VC11 / 12 & VC3 / 4

XC Fabric
E3 / T3
FE / GBE
E 1/ T1
Figure 2-3 Interface Block Diagram
STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
CHAPTER 3 INTERFACES
3 INTERFACES
3.1
Power Supply
The O9400S supports various power supply interfaces:

Single AC plug-in power supply module (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz)
Single DC plug-in power supply module -48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc)
Fixed AC/DC power supply (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz) / -48 Vdc (-36 to-75 Vdc)
3.1.1 Power module, -48V DC
The -48V DC supply input is provided via a 3 pin power connector with the following pin-out:
Table 3-1 Pin-out for -48 DC Connector
Pin-out for -48 DC
Pin
Signal
+
+48
-48V
GND
The -48V DC input conforms to the specifications given in the table below.
Table 3-2 Electrical Specifications for DC Compliance
Electrical Specifications for DC Module Compliance
Parameter
Limit
Input power dissipation
Fuse
Battery voltage range
Less than 37W

3.15A
-36 to -75V
Table 3-3 Power Supply Compliance

Power Supply Compliance
Standard
Comment
EN/IEC 60950
Safety General information
ETS 300 132-2
Power supply interface at the input to the

telecommunication equipment; Part 2: Operated at DC
ETS 300 253
Grounding and bonding of telecommunication

equipment in telecommunication centers
10
3.1.2 Power module, 100~240 Vac

Single AC plug-in power supply module (100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz)
Connection
Power supply cord (2.5m) with safety ground.
Table 3-4 Electrical Specifications for AC

Electrical Specifications for AC Module
Parameter
Limit
Power dissipation
34 Watts
Fuse
2A
Output power
36.3 Watts
Table 3-5 AC Compliance

Standard
EN/IEC 60950-1
ETS 300 253
Comment
Single phase 100 to 240 Vac, 50/60Hz AC mains
supply
Grounding and bonding of telecommunication
equipment in telecommunication centers
3.2
ALARM INTERFACE
3.2.1 Description
The O9400S provides facilities to report a minimum of 4 auxiliary alarm inputs for
associated equipment, e.g. power unit failure battery condition, cabinet door etc. and
4 dedicated alarm outputs. The alarm outputs are related to the unit alarm indicator
and the traffic alarm indicator. The input alarms are reported to the management
system and are activated by a closed or open Loop condition between a pair of
contacts.
11
Connectors
The alarm input interface connector is a RJ-45 connector. The pin-out is defined in the table
below.
Table 3-6 Pin-out for Alarm Input Connector
Pin-out for Alarm Input Connector
Pin
Signal
Alarm input 1 ground
Alarm input 1 power
Alarm input 2 power
Alarm input 3 power
Alarm input 4 power
The alarm output interface connector is a RJ-45 connector, with the pin-out defined in the
table below.
Table 3-7 Pin-out for Alarm Output Connector
Pin-out for Alarm Output Connector
Pin
3.2.2
Signal
Critical alarm output pin 1
Critical alarm output pin 2
Major alarm output pin 1
Major alarm output pin 2
Minor alarm output pin 1
Minor alarm output pin 2
Information alarm output pin 1
Information alarm output pin 2
Electrical Parameters Alarm Input

Table 3-8 Electrical Specifications at Alarm Input
Electrical Specifications at Alarm Input
Parameter
Value
Nominal open contact voltage

Nominal closed contact current
Max. closed contact resistance
Min. open contact resistance
12
5V
5 mA
33 ohm
10k ohm
3.2.3
Electrical Parameters Alarm Output

Table 3-9 Electrical Specifications at Alarm Output
Electrical Specifications at Alarm Output
Parameter
Value
Maximum switching voltage
110 V DC, 125 V AC
Maximum switching current

Initial surge voltage Between open contacts
Maximum contact resistance
3.3
1A
1,500 V (FCC Part 68)
100m
VT-100 TERMINAL INTERFACE
3.3.1 Description
The O9400S offers an interface for connecting a VT-100 monitor. The interface is runs at
a data rate of 9600 baud
3.3.2 Connector
The RS232 interface for O9400S is provided via a DB-9 connector, with the following
pin-out:
Table 3-10 Pin-out for VT-100 Connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3.3.3
Pin-out for VT-100 Connector

Pin
Signal
DCD
TXD
RXD
NC
GND
DSR
NC
CTS
NC
Compliance
Table 3-11 RS-232 Interface Compliance
RS-232 Interface Compliance
Standard
Comment
EIA RS-232
Physical interface
13
3.4
System Timing Sources and Connector
Loop-O9400-S
Loop-O9400S
West STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
Line Clock (SSM)
East STM-1/4
(OC-3/12)
Line Clock (SSM)
Internal
External Timing
(Fixed Clock Quality
Setting)
1 out of 3 Tributary Clocks

(Fixed Clock Quality
Setting)
Figure 3-1 Timing Inputs for the O9400S
As illustrated in the figure above, the timing sources for the O9400S are:
Internal clock
West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line clock
East STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line clock
1 External Clock
3 Tributary clocks
The accuracy of the Internal Clock is 4.6 ppm.
The external timing can be:
SDH:
E1-CRC, E1-FAS, 2MHz
SONET: T1-ESF, T1-D4, 2 MHz
Per G.811, the clock quality can be distributed to and derived from the East STM-1/4 (OC3/12) Line and West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line by using SSM (Synchronization Status
Message) over S1 byte. The SSM message is carried over S1 bytes on the two STM-1/4
(OC-3/12) aggregate lines. For External Timing interfaces and Tributary Timing interfaces,
the SSM messaging of clock quality is not supported. Instead, the clock quality of External
Timing and Tributary Timing are user configurable and static once set. In summary, the clock
sources with SSM support (East STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line & West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) Line)
are defined as Dynamic-Quality Clock Group. While the clock sources (External timing,
Tributary timing, & Internal timing) with fixed clock quality are defined as Fixed-Quality Clock
Group
Note: Optionally, the system can be dynamically locked to a clock source based on the
quality, either of dynamic or of fixed type, of the enabled clock sources.
In addition to clock quality, the O9400S accept user programmable priority setting for each
clock input.
Note: Optionally, the O9400S can also do clock selection strictly based on the priorities set by
the user.
In summary, there are 3 clock selection modes supported on O9400S. They are listed below.
14
Strictly Priority Based Revertive denoted as Revertive mode

Strictly Priority Based Nonrevertive Denoted as Non-Revertive mode
SSM + Priority SSM mode
If Revertive is chosen as the clock selection mode, then the system clock selection will be
strictly based on the availability and priority of each interface. When a valid clock with the
highest priority among the available clocks, then it will be chosen. The clock quality will be
ignored in this mode. Obviously, Revertive means the clock source will be switch back to the
interface of higher priority when its recovered from failure. If all the clock inputs become
unavailable, then the system will enter Clock Hold-over mode.
If Non-Revertive is chosen as the clock selection mode, then the behavior will be exactly the
same as Revertive mode, except the switch back activity, described above. Even though a
clock input with higher priority is recovered from failure, the system clock source will NOT be
switch from existing locked source with lower priority to the higher one.
If the SSM clock mode is chosen, then the clock source selection decision will be based on
the SSM clock quality received from East and West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) lines.
the clock quality of the clock source with highest priority, if any, within the Fixed-Quality
Clock Group
The O9400S system will be locked to the clock input with higher clock quality (lower value).
Note: Hold-over means that when clock loss occurs, the PLL (Phase Lock Loop) will
synchronize clock phases so no data glitches occur during clock reference switchover from
primary to secondary or vise versa.
3.4.1 Connectors
External timing input and output is provided on 8 pin RJ-45 connector, with the
following pin-out:
Table 3-12 Pin-out for Synchronization Port
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.4.2
Pin-out for Synchronization Port

Pin
Signal
Sync input +
Sync input NC
Sync output +
Sync output -
NC
GND
GND
Compliance
Table 3-13 Synchronization Interface Compliance
Synchronization Interface Compliance
Standard
Comment
ETS 300 246

ETS 300 247
ETS 300 011
ETS 300 126
ITU-T G.703
Connector
Connector
Impedance towards ground
Output signal balance
Cable attenuation
15
3.5
16 E1/T1
3.5.1 Brief description

The tributaries on the main board unit are classified as the 1st Tributary Group.
E1/T1are the only interface types available on the main board unit. The interface type is
software readable. Only short-haul E1/T1 interface is required. The E1 and T1 are
configurable through software.
Depending upon manufacturing options there are Nx E1/T1 ports available, where N=16, 8,
0.
When N=0, there are two possibilities as listed below:
(a). Regenerator case or (b) only Adding/dropping traffic from the 2nd Tributary group.
Intra-building lightening protection circuit is supported for all E1/T1 ports.
3.5.2 Power consumption
Total power consumption => Up to 16 ports Max. 3.1W
3.5.3 Connector type
The 16xE1/T1 card for O9400S is provided via one SCSI connector, with the
following pin-out:
Table 3-14 Pin-out for SCSI Connector

E1/T1
Port Number
(Port 1-16)
1
6
7
SCSI 68
Pin Number
E1
Signal
15
16
49
50
13
14
47
48
11
12
45
46
9
10
43
44
7
8
41
42
5
6
39
40
3
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
16
E1/T1
Port Number
(Port 1-16)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SCSI 68
Pin Number
E1
Signal
4
37
38
1
2
35
36
31
32
65
66
29
30
63
64
27
28
61
62
25
26
59
60
23
24
57
58
21
22
55
56
19
20
53
54
17
18
51
52
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Tx Tip
Tx Ring
Rx Tip
RX Ring
Note: Loop E1/T1 products use SCSI-68 pin connectors with two hexagonal stand-off screws
as shown in the photo below. The nut portion of the stand-off screw has an inside diameter of
2.2 mm. It is not a standard size for most cable connectors.
Figure 3-2 Loop SCSI Connector
17
In order to use standard, commercially available cable connectors, you must replace the
stand-off screws with the screws in this package. The nut portion of these screws has an
inside diameter of 2.6 mm.
3.5.4
Compliance
Table 3-15 16 E1 interface Compliance
Standard
ETS 300 011
Impedance towards ground

Tolerable longitudinal voltage
ETS 300 126
Output signal balance
ITU-T G.703
Cable attenuation
Input reflection loss
Input port immunity against reflection
Output pulse mask
Output jitter in the absence of input jitter
Output combined jitter
ITU-T G.783
3.5.5
16 E1 interface Compliance
Comment
Functional Block Diagram

30x3 Header
Pitch:2.54mm
Microprocess
or
Interface
SCSI II
68-Pins
Transformer
LIU
E1/T1
Mapper
Telecom
Bus
Interrupt
Equipment
Figure 3-3 16 E1 Block Diagram
18
3.6
E3/T3 Interface Card

The tributaries on the main board unit are classified as the 2nd and 3rd Tributary Group.
E3/T3 are the only interface types available on the daughter board unit. The interface type is
software readable and configurable. The board provides 3 ports DS3/E3 for O9400S. The port
can be configured to be either DS3 or E3. The E3 can be mapped into STM-1/TUG-3. The
DS3 can be mapped into either STM-1/TUG-3 or STS-3/STS-1.
Total power consumption => Up to 3 ports Max. 4.2W
3.6.3
Connector type
The connector type is RF.
Figure 3-4 Loop RF Connector

3.6.4
Compliance
Table 3-16 E3/DS3 Interface Compliance
Standard
E3/DS3 Interface Compliance

Comment
ITU-T G.823
E3 Outuput Jitter/Input Jitter Tolerance
ITU-T G.824
DS3 Output Jitter/ Input Jitter Tolerance
ITU-T G.703
Bellcore GR-499
E3 Pulse Mask.
DS3 Pulse Mask.
19
3.6.5
Figure 3-5 E3/DS3 Block Diagram
20
3.7
RS232 x 2

This RS232x2 function is on the O9400S main-board. Both Revertive or Non-Revertive 1+1
protection are supported. There are up to 31 channels per E1, where n = 1~31.
Total power consumption => 0.4W
3.7.3 Connector type
The RS232x2 for O9400S is provided via one DB9 connector, with the following pin-out:
Table 3-17 Pin-out for 2*RS232 Connector
Pin-out for 2*RS232 Connector
Pin
Signal
RS232_TXD1
RS232_RXD1
GND
NC
RS232_TXD2
RS232_RXD2
GND
NC
NC
Note: Pins 1~4 and pins 5~8 are referred to as Port-1 and Port-2 respectively on the O9400S
device.
3.7.4
Compliance
Table 3-18 RS232 Interface Compliance
RS232 Interface Compliance
Standard
Comment
RS-232-C
RS-232 protocol
21
3.7.5
Digital Interface
TCLK1
Digital Interface
TXD1
SDH
component
RCLK1
TXD1
RXD1
RXD1
FPGA
TCLK2
TXD2
TXD2
RXD2
RCLK2
RXD2
Figure 3-6 RS232x2 Block Diagram
22
Analog Interface
TXD1
RS232
LIU
RXD1
DB9
TXD2
RXD2
3.8
Ethernet Interface
3.8.1 Brief Description

Two types of Ethernet interface cards are available Ethernet card with switch and Ethernet
card without switch. Please refer to section 7.4 on page 293 for information on card types and
functions.
3.8.1.1 Ethernet Interface with Switch
The EoS module with L2 switch can be ordered with an uplink speed of 1 GbE or 4/8 100
Mbps.
Fast Ethernet Interface with Switch (1GbE + 3 FE)
LAN1~3 are FE interfaces
LAN4 is a GbE interface
WAN1~8 available (maximum bandwidth of 100Mbps per WAN)
Figure 3-7 Fast Ethernet Interface with Switch
LAN
1
LAN
2
FE Phy.
Switch
LAN
3
LAN
4
Ethernet
Mapper
Telecom
Bus
GE Phy.
Figure 3-8 Fast Ethernet (FE) with Switch Block Diagram
23
Giga Ethernet Interface with Switch (1GbE + 3 FE)
WAN1 available only (maximum bandwidth is 622Mbps)
Figure 3-9 Giga Ethernet Interface with Switch
LAN
1
LAN
2
FE Phy.
LAN
3
LAN
4
Switch
Ethernet
Mapper
Telecom
Bus
GE Phy.
Figure 3-10 Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) with Switch Block Diagram
24
3.8.1.2
Ethernet Interface without Switch
The Eternet interface without a switch can be ordered as either Fast Ethernet or Giga
Ethernet.
The differences are explained below.
Fast Ethernet Interface without Switch (4 FE)
Figure 3-11 Fast Ethernet Interface without Switch
Figure 3-12 Fast Ethernet (FE) without Switch Block Diagram
25
Giga Ethernet Interface without Switch (1GbE)
Figure 3-13 Giga Ethernet Interface without Switch
WAN Side
LAN Side
LAN
14
Ethernet
Mapper
GE Phy.
Telecom
Bus
Figure 3-14 Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) without Switch Block Diagram
3.8.2
Power Consumption
Table 3-19 Ethernet Switch Power Consumption
Item
O9400S startup with Ethernet
SW
add one optical module
add a second optical module
net 4 port linkup and run traffic
Power Consumption
27.1 W
28.3 W
29.1 W
31.8 W
26
Note
These figures are for a
device using single DC
power.
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
3.8.3
RJ45 Connector
The Ethernet Port Interface has an RJ-45 connector. The pinouts are listed below.
Table 3-20 RJ-45 Pinout for Ethernet Port
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ-45 Pinout for Ethernet Port

Signal
Signal Direction
Transmit Data +
Output from O9400S
Transmit Data Output from O9400S
Receive Data +
Input to O9400S
No Connection
No Connection
Receive Data Input to O9400S
No Connection
No Connection
27
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
4 OPERATION
4.1
SYSTEM
4.1.1 Introduction
The system module contains the processor system for the O9400S.
The module supports a serial RS-232/VT100 interface for local access. A VT100 terminal
can be used for initial configuration. The module also supports a 10/100Base-T LAN
interface used for management purposes.
The module contains the local synchronization interface for the O9400S. This interface is
directly connected to the SETS functionality on the motherboard. The module also provides
ten LEDs to indicate the status of the O9400S. The LED's are visible at the front of the
O9400S.
4.1.2 Technical overview
4.1.2.1
Management port
A local Ethernet port (10/100BaseT), called the Management Port, is available for
connecting to a management DCN. The management signals goes to an Ethernet
Controller in the MPC852 processor situated on the module.
4.1.2.2
VT100 Port
The O9400S offers a VT-100 interface for connection of Terminal/CLI interface. The interface
is running at a data rate of 1.2K to 38.4K.
4.1.2.3
Clock Source
System clock sources (both in and out) are as follows: Internal clock, East STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)
line clock, West STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) line clock, one external clock, three tributary clocks. For
further clock source details please refer to Section 3.4, System Timing Sources and
Connector, in this manual.
4.1.2.4 Power
The voltages are generated on board with the exception of the 3.3V that comes directly from
the power module(s). The power consumption should not exceed 18.9W.
Reset If the O9400S system is not active, it should be reset.
4.1.2.5 LEDs
The front panel of the O9400S has multi-color LEDs for operation and error indications. The
indication is either off, steady on, or flickering. The following table lists each LED and its color
and the meaning it represents. Note that when powering up and the selftest is in progress,
the unit front panel LEDs are also used to indicate fault conditions.
28
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
Table 4-1 LED Indication for Main Unit

LED
POWER
ACTIVE
ALM
Color
Indication
Off
Power off or self-test failure
Green
Normal operation
Off
CPU fails
Flashing Green Normal
Off
This LED is used to indicate SDH/SONET alarm status. LP-TIM, LPUNEQ, LP-PLM, LP-RDI, LP-BIP, LP-REI, E1/T1-LOS, and E1/T1-AIS are
indicated only when TSA assigned.
Alarm is disabled
Red
Critical alarm or Major alarm occurs
Amber
Minor alarm occurs
Green
Normal, alarm informative message occurs

This LED is used to indicate the status of 1st east-side trunk module
Ea
Off
Trunk module is not installed or not be used by a selected system mode
Green
Normal
Red
Loss of frame (LOF) or Loss of signal (LOS)
Amber
Alarm indication signal (MS-AIS) or Remote defect indication (MS-RDI)
Flashing Amber Loopback or diagnostics

This LED is used to indicate the status of 2nd east-side trunk module
Eb
Off
Trunk module is not installed or not be used by a selected system mode
Green
Normal
Red
Amber

This LED is used to indicate the status of 1st west-side trunk module
Wa
Off
Trunk module is not installed or not in use by a selected system mode
Green
Normal
Red
Amber

ACO
Off
Normal
Red
Alarm occurs (For any alarm type)
Table 4-2 LED Indication for System Mode

System Mode
TM 1+1
2TM
ADM
Ea
Eb
Wa
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Note: for ON, the LED color could be green, red, or amber.
29
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
Table 4-3 LED Indications for E1/T1, E3/T3, Ethernet Cards
E1/T1 Single LED
Color
Indication
Off
Red
Amber
Green
Flashing Amber
This LED is used to indicate the alarm status of E1/T1:

TU-LOP,TU-AIS,LP-TIM,LP-UNEQ,LP-PLM,LP-RDI,LPBIP,LP-REI,E1/T1-LOS,and E1/T1-AIS (only when TSA
assigned)
No TSA assigned
Minor alarm occurs
Normal or Alarm informative message occurs
Loopback or diagnostics
E1/T1 LED
E3/T3 Single LED

E3/T3 LED
Color
Indication
This LED is used to indicate the alarm status of E3/T3:
LOP, AIS, TIM, UNEQ, PLM, RDI, BIP, REI, E3/T3LOS, and E3/T3-AIS (only when TSA assigned)
Off
Red
Amber
No TSA assigned
Minor alarm occurs
Green
Flashing Amber
Normal or Alarm informative message occurs

Loopback or diagnostics
Giga Ethernet without Switch (1GE4NSW Card)

LED
Color
Indication
Red
TG init fail /Critical or major alarms occur
ACT
ACT
Amber
Green
Off
Amber
Off
TG is initializing/Minor alarms occur

TG init OK/ Informative alarms occur
Unsync or link down
Link speed 1000M
No TX/RX Data
DUP
Blinking Green
Off
TX/RX Data
Link down
Green
Full duplex
G
P1
Fast Ethernet Without Switch (4FE4NSW)

LED
Color
ACT
10/100
P1
ACT
10/100
P2
ACT
10/100
P3
ACT
P4
10/100
ACT
Red
Amber
Green
Off
Green
Off
Green
Blinking Green
Off
Green
OFF
Green
Blinking Green
OFF
Green
OFF
Green
Blinking Green
OFF
Green
OFF
Green
Blinking Green
Indication

Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Link up
TX/RX Data
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Link up
TX/RX Data
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Link up
TX/RX Data
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Link up
TX/RX Data
30
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
Fast Ethernet Switch & Giga Ethernet Switch (4EoS1SW/4EoS6SW)
LED
ACT
P4 LINK
ACT
P1
A10/100
ACT
P2
10/100
ACT
P3
10/100
P4
ACT
DUP
Color
Red
Amber
Green
Indication
Off
Amber
Green
Off
Off
Blinking Green
Off
Green
Off
Blinking Green
Off
Green
Link down
Link speed 1G
Link speed 100M
Link speed 10M
Link down
Data TX/RX
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Link down
Data TX/RX
Link speed 10M
Link speed 100M
Off
Blinking Green
Off
Link down
Data TX/RX
Link speed 10M
Green
Link speed 100M
Off
Blinking Green
Off
Green
Link down
Data TX/RX
Half-Duplex
Full-Duplex
Note: 1GE4NSW card only supports 1000 M Full duplex.
31
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION
4.2
External Alarms
The O9400S provides facilities to report four auxiliary alarm inputs for associated
equipment, e.g. power module failure, battery condition, open cabinet door etc. It also
supports two alarm outputs used to signal equipment alarms and traffic related alarms.
The alarm input/output connector is placed on the fan unit front cover.
32
CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATIONS
5 System Operations
The O9400S provides comprehensive report and configuration capability through the console
port. By using single-character commands and arrow keys, the O9400S can be configured
and monitored through the use of a VT-100 terminal. The single-character commands are not
case sensitive, except for when using a password. On each screen, the available commands
and the configurable fields are highlighted.
When a VT-100 terminal is connected to the CONSOLE port of the O9400S, a main menu is
displayed on the VT-100 monitor. The main menu consists of four groups of commands,
DISPLAY, LOG, SETUP, and MISC. All commands are detailed in the VT-100 Main Menu
Tree illustrations below.
This chapter provides detailed setup instructions. After connecting your VT-100 monitor to
the Loop device, your first setup steps should be as follows:
1. Log on and set up your password (see Section 5.1 Logon and Password Setup)
2. Set your system to SDH or SONET (see Section 5.14 SDH/SONET System Mode
Setup)
VT-100 Main Menu

Tree Overview
[SETUP]
[DISPLAY]
C > System Config Display
S > System Config Setup

D > SDH/SONET Config Setup
I > System Information

B > SDH/SONET Config Display
M > Alarm Setup
Q > Alarm Queue
V > Store/Retrieve Backup Config
T > System Log Information
L > File Transfer
A > SDH/SONET Alarm Status
R > Performance Setup/Clear
P > SDH/SONET Performance
[MISC]
[LOG]
F > Log off
Y > Alarm Cut off
O > Log on
Z > System Reset

X > Clear Alarm Queue
U > Choose a Unit
W > Return to Default
Figure 5-1 VT-100 Main Menu Tree Overview
33
VT-100 Menu Tree

LOG and MISC Sections
[LOG]
[MISC]
F > Log off
Y > Alarm Cutoff
O > Logon
Z > System Reset
U>
X >
Clear Alarm Queue
W >
Return to Default
Choose a Unit
[Display]
N > E 1 /T 1 Mode Display
> Line Coding Display
D > Line Config Display
> Low - Order Path Overhead Display
S > Unit Diagnostics

.
Display
> Customer Information Display
> Currently-Active Alarm Summary
> Unit Alarm Status
H > E1/ T1 SNCP Status

A > Current Alarm Status
P>
Unit Performance
1 > 01-Hour Performance
[Log]
F > Log Off
3 > 07-Day Performance
O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
E > Return to Main Menu
[ Setup]
T > E1/T1 Mode Setup
C > Line Config Setup
G > Unit Diagnostics Setup
A > Line Coding Setup

B > Low- Order Path Overhead Setup
C > Customer Information Setup
A > Channel Looback Setup
B > Channel Diagnostics Setup
K > SNCP User Command

M > Unit Alarm Setup
[ Misc]
A > Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

B > Unit Alarm Severity Setup
A > Clear Performance Data
B > Performance Threshold Setup
X > Clear Unit Alarm Queue

W > Unit Load Default & Reset
Figure 5-2 VT-100 E1 Menu Tree LOG and MISC Sections
34
VT-100 Menu Tree

[LOG]
[MISC]
F > Log off
Y > Alarm Cutoff
O > Logon
Z > System Reset
U>
X >
Clear Alarm Queue
W >
Return to Default
Choose a Unit
[Display]
N > E 1 /T 1 Mode Display
> Line Coding Display
> Low - Order Path Overhead Display
S > Unit Diagnostics

.
Display
C
D
> TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Display

> Currently-Active Alarm Summary
> Unit Alarm Status
H > E1/ T1 SNCP Status

P>
Unit Performance
[Log]
F > Log Off
O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
[ Setup]

B > Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
C > TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
D > Customer Information Setup

[ Misc]

X > Clear Unit Alarm Queue

W > Unit Load Default & Reset
Figure 5-3 VT-100 T1 Menu Tree LOG and MISC Sections
35
Figure 5-4 VT-100 E3 Menu Tree LOG and MISC Sections
36
VT- 100 Menu Tree

[LOG]
[MISC]
F > Log off
>
Alarm Cutoff
O > Logon
>
System Reset
U>
>
Clear Alarm Queue
Choose a Unit
[Display]
A
W > Return to Default

> Line Transmit Length Display
>
S > Unit Diagnostics Display
C
D
> Mapping Mode Display

N > E3/T3 Mode Display
H > E3/T3 SNCP Status
SDH/ SONET Path Overhead Display
A > Currently - Active Alarm Summary
B > Unit Alarm Status
P > Unit Performance

[Log]
F >
Log Off

O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
[Setup]
T > E3 /T 3 Mode Setup
A > Line Transmit Length Setup

B > Mapping Mode Setup
C > SDH/ SONET Path Overhead Setup

[Misc]

X > Cl ear Unit Alarm History

W > Unit Load Default
Figure 5-5 VT-100 T3 Menu Tree LOG and MISC Sections
37
VT-
100 Menu Tree

DISPLAY Section
[ DISPLAY
]
C>
System Config Display
I>
System Information
B >SDH/
SONET Config Display
A > System Display
1 > East & West Fiber Information
A > SDH/ SONET Mode Display
B>
Timing Source Display
2 > Unit Information
B > SDH/ SONET Protection Display
C>
Loopback Timer Display
3 > Power & Chassis Information
C > ALS/ APSD Display
4 > CPU Information
D > SDH/ SONET Granularity Display
D > Bridge& RSTP Info Display

E>
Gateway Network Element
E >XC/ TSA Table Display
F>
DHCP Relay Display
F >XC/
G>
Remote Management Display
G > SDH/ SONET Overhead Display

A > SDH/ SONET Line Overhead Display
H > SNTP Display
TSA Active Map Display
B > Ho- Path/ STS- Path Overhead Display
I > RS232 Config Display
H>
Active Diagnostics Display
J > Hand - waving LED Display
I>
MSP Status Display
K > SNMP System Config Display
J>
Customer Information Display
Q > Alarm Queue
A > SDH/
T > System Log Information
SONET Alarm Status
P > SDH/SONET Performance Statistics
A > Current Active Alarm Status
1 > 01-
Hour Performance
B > SDH/SONET Line Alarm Status
2 > 24-
Hour Performance
C> Ho- Path/ STS- Path Alarm Status
3 > 07-
Day Performance
D> Lo- Path/ VT-
Path Alarm Status
Figure 5-6 VT-100 Menu Tree DISPLAY Section
38
VT- 100 Menu Tree

SETUP Section
[ SETUP]
D > SDH/ SONET Config Setup
M > Alarm Setup
A > System Setup
A > SDH/ SONET Mode Setup
A > System Alarm Setup
B > Timing Source Setup
B > SDH/SONET Protection Setup
B > SDH- Line/ SONET- Line Alarm

Mask/ Relay Setup
C > Loopback Timer Setup
C > ALS/ APSD Setup
C > Ho- Path/ STS- Path Alarm

Mask/ Relay Setup
D > Password Setup
D > SDH/ SONET Granularity Setup
D > Lo- Path/ VT- Path Alarm

Mask/ Relay Setup
E>
E > XC/ TSA Create Setup
E > SDH/ SONET Alarm Severity Setup
F > Gateway Network Element Setup
F > XC/ TSA Delete Setup
F > SD/ SF Threshold Setup
G > DHCP Relay Setup
G > XC/ TSA Map Configuration
G > External Alarm Setup
H>
H > SDH/SONET Overhead

. Setup
H > Insert AIS Alarm Setup
Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
Remote Management Setup
I > SNTP Setup
I > Line Loopback Setup
J > RS 232 Config Setup
J > MSP USER Command
K > RS 232 Loopback Test
K>
Customer Information Setup
L > Hand- waving LED Setup

M > SNMP System Config Setup
N > SSH Setup
V > Store/ Retrieve Backup Config
L > File Transfer
R > Performance Setup

/ Clear
A > Download Firmware
B > Download Current Configuration
B>
Performance Threshold Setup
C >Download Backup Configuration

D > Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
E > Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
F > Change Firmware Boot Bank
Figure 5-7 VT-100 Menu Tree SETUP Section
39
5.1
Logon and Password Setup
5.1.1 Logon/off
When the O9400S is powered on, the screen will show as below. If the terminal screen is
illegible, press the Enter and Esc key alternatively to bring up the main menu. This is
particularly needed if the terminal is connected to the controller while the power is already
applied. If the main menu still fails to appear, check to see that the terminal is configured as
9600, 8, n, 1, and that a proper null modem or a null modem cable is used.
Press O to logon. A prompt will ask you for your user name. Five user names are available.
One is ADMIN, which allows you to view and modify the system configuration. The others
are OPERATOR, OPERATOR1, OPERATOR2 and OPERATOR3. Signing in as an Operator
allows you to view the current configuration only. Key in one of these user names in upper
case (ie. capital) letters. Then press the Enter key. A new prompt will ask for your password.
Key it in using capital letters only. (The default password is LOOP.)
Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
14:04:50 03/30/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D
Software Version: V1.01.01 03/29/2007
Connect Port: SUPV_PORT

Start Time : 17:22:04 03/29/2007
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
[MISC]
>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>
For an ADMIN user, a full Main Menu will appear after keying in the password. To logoff press
F.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
C -> System Config Display
I -> System Information
B -> SDH/SONET Config Display
Q -> Alarm Queue
T -> System Log Information
A -> SDH/SONET Alarm Status
P -> SDH/SONET Performance Statistics
[SETUP]
S -> System Config Setup
D -> SDH/SONET Config Setup
M -> Alarm Setup
V -> Store/Retrieve Backup Config
L -> File Transfer
R -> Performance Setup/Clear
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
X -> Clear Alarm Queue
W -> Return to Default
40
For an OPERATOR user, a partial Main Menu will appear after keying in the password. To
logoff, press F.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
5.1.2 Change a Password

The full menu path for changing a password is as follows:
O > Logon
D > Password Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown below.
Note: Password can be alphabetic, numeric or a combination of both. Alphabetic characters
can be keyed in as upper case or lower case. Maximum password size is 10 characters.
To change a password, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
41
The System Config Setup screen will appear. Press D.

O9400SA
=== System Config Setup ===
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Loopback Timer setup
Password Setup
Gateway Network Element Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
Hand-waving LED setup
SNMP System Config Setup
SSH Setup
<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>
The password setup screen will appear. Use your keyboard arrow keys to move the asterisk
to select either Operator or Administrator. Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== Password Setup ===
11:03:02 07/16/2007
<< ARROW LEFT/RIGHT: Select Password; Enter: Accept to change; ESC: Exit. >>
Select :
Operator
*Administrator
Key in your old password and press the Enter key. (The default password is LOOP in upper
case letters.)
O940 0SA
= Pa sswo rd Set up = ==
11 :07 :06
07/1 6/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, BA CKS PACE to ed it, ESC to abo rt
<< A RRO W L EFT/ RIG HT: Sel ect Pa sswo rd; En ter: Ac cep t to ch ang e; E SC: Ex it.
>>
Sele ct :
Op era tor
* Adm ini stra tor
O ld
Pas swo rd : XX XX
>> Ple ase inp ut old pas swo rd, the n p res s EN TER .
42
Key in your new password and press the Enter key.

Note: Maximum password size is 10 characters. Minimum password size is 1 character.
Both alphabetic and/or numeric characters are allowed.
O9400SA
11:07:06 07/16/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
Select :
Operator
*Administrator
Old
New
Password : XXXX
Password : XXXX
>> Please input new password, then press ENTER .
Confirm your password by keying it in again. Press the Enter key.

O9400SA
11:07:06 07/16/2007
Select :
Operator
*Administrator
Old Password : XXXX
New Password : XXXX
Confirm Password: XXXX
>> Please input new password again to confirm, then press ENTER .
A prompt will ask if you want to save the new password. Press Y for yes.
O9400SA
11:14:47 07/16/2007
Select :
Operator
*Administrator
Old Password : XXXX
New Password : XXXX
Confirm Password: XXXX
>> Save new password (Y/N)?
Note: Write your password down and keep it in a safe place in case you forget it.
Press the Esc key twice to return to the Main Menu.
43
5.2
System Setup
The full menu path for System Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
A > System Setup
5.2.1 Setup Screen Access
To setup the System Configuration, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press A.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
44

5.2.2 System Setup Procedure
The System Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each field.
Key in the Time and Date.
Time format is hr (0-24):min.(0-60):sec.(0-60).
Date format is month (1-12):day(1-31):year(4 digits)
Key in the IP Address, Gateway IP and Subnet Mask for your O9400S device. If you do not
know these addresses, obtain them from your network administrator. The valid range for
these addresses is 0255.
Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting for the fields shown in the following table.
Table 5-1 System Setup Setting Options

Field
Setting Options
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Port
RSTP
Telnet Lockout
Telnet Timeout
Console Timeout
System Location:
System Contact
Baud Rate
System Contact
[Console Port]
Baud Rate
Data Length
Parity
DISABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE, DISABLE
Range is 300~3600 sec
Range is 300~3600 sec
DISABLE
0600 seconds
0600 seconds
Note
Key in info.
Key in info.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
7-Bits, 8-bits
NONE, EVEN, ODD
1-Bit, 2-Bits
XON, XOFF
Data Length
Parity
Stop Bit
XON_XOFF
O9400SA
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR
[System]
Time/Date
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Port RSTP
Device Name
System Location
Default Setting
ENABLE, DISABLE
ENABLE, DISABLE
9600
8-bit
NONE
1-Bit
XOFF
=== System Setup ===

14:14:34 05/21/2009
MOVE, Please Input: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
14:14:35 05/21/2009
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
DISABLE
ENABLE
O9400SA
8F, No.8 Hsin Ann Rd.
Science-Based Industrial
Hsinchu, 30078 Taiwan
Gateway IP
Telnet Lockout : DISABLE

Telnet Timeout : 0600 seconds
Console Timeout: 0600 seconds
Park
: Name:FAE Tel:+886-3-5787696
E-mail: FAE@loop.com.tw
: 9600
: 8-Bits
: NONE
: 000.000.000.000
Fax:+886-3-5787695
Stop Bit
XON_XOFF
: 1-Bit
: XOFF
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>
After scrolling in your settings press the Enter key.

Note: Disabling the Ethernet Port RSTP may cause a looping problem.
Note: Device name field will accept up to 25 characters
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes.
45
You will be returned to the System Config setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to the
Main Menu.
The full menu path for storing a configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
Press V to store the configuration.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor
to STORE. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to store this configuration.
Press Y for yes.
O940 0SA
7/16 /20 07
=== Sto re/ Retr iev e C onfi gur ati on== =
1 6:06 :37
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE
>> S tor e C urre nt Con figu rat ion ? [ Y/N ]
A prompt will ask you to key in your password. After keying it in press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
07/1 6/2 007
=== Stor e/R etr ieve Co nfi gura tio n== =
16 :08 :40
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE
==>> En ter pas swo rd : XX XX
The word Saving will temporarily appear on your screen. When it disappears, press the Esc
key to return to the Main Menu.
O940 0SA
07/1 6/2 007
= ==S tore /Re tri eve Con fig urat ion ===
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
=== > S avi ng.. ... ..
R ETR IEVE
46
16: 09: 37
5.3
Timing Source Setup
The full menu path for Timing Source Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
B > Timing Source Setup
To setup the clock source, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press B.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
47

5.3.2 Timing Source Setup Procedure
The Timing Source Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
Clock Mode field. Use the tab key to scroll in your settings. Available choices are: Strict
(Non-revertive), Strict (Revertive) and SSM. Press the Enter key.
Note: For clock mode
Strict (Non-revertive) means that if a clock source fails, the next clock source in line will be
used. When the original clock source functions again, the device will not revert back to that
clock source.
Strict (Revertive) means that if a clock source fails, the next clock source in line will be used.
When the original clock source functions again, the device will revert back to that clock source.
SSM stands for Synchronous Status Message. Basically, SSM monitors the clock sources
and automatically selects the best one.
O9400SA
=== Timing Source Setup ===
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Clock Mode
16:44:30 07/16/2007
Strict(Revertive)
An expanded setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings in the Priority,
Interface, Carry Bit, and Impedance fields.
Table 5-2 Timing Source Setting Options

Field
Priority 1st
Priority 2nd
Priority 3rd
Priority 4th
Interface
Quality
SSM Message
Carry Bit:
Impedance
Setting Options
Default Setting
East, West, External, Trib-1, Trib-2*,

Trib-3*, NULL
NULL
Internal, NULL
SDH: E1-CRC, E1-FAS, 2 MHz
SONET: T1-ESF, T1-D4, 2 MHz
Static, Auto (for SSM Mode)
Key in any message you wish to use
(0~9, A~F)
Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7, Sa8
120 ohm, 75 ohm
Internal
SDH: E1-CRC
SONET: T1-ESF
Static
0
*Note: This option is only available on E1T1 and E3T3 cards.
48
Sa4
120 ohm
Note
After scrolling in your settings press the Enter key.

O9400SA
Clock Mode
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
:
:
:
:
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
Current Clock
16:47:31 07/16/2007
Strict(Revertive)
[Source]
East
West
External
Internal
[Quality]
Static
Static
Static
Static
[SSM Message]
0
0
0
0
: 4th
External Clock
-------------Interface: E1-CRC
Carry Bit: Sa4
Impedance: 120ohm
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for yes. Press Enter
O9400SA
17:29:44 07/16/2007

Clock Mode
Priority
Priority
Priority
Priority
:
:
:
:
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
Current Clock
Strict(Revertive)
[Source]
East
West
External
Internal
[Quality]
Static
Static
Static
Static
[SSM Message]
0
0
0
0
: 4th
External Clock
-------------Interface: E1-CRC
Carry Bit: Sa4
Impedance: 120ohm
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)
You will be returned to the System Config Setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to the
Main Menu.
To store the configuration you must press V from the Main Menu. The menu path is as
follows:
O > Logon
For a detailed, screen by screen example of this procedure, please refer to Section 5.30,
Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration.
49
5.4
Loopback Timer Setup
The full menu path for Loopback Timer Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
C > Loopback Timer setup
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press C.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
50
5.4.2 LoopBack Timer Setup Procedure

Loopback Timer Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
All line Loopback timer field. Use the tab key to scroll in your setting. Setting range is
0~260000)
O9400SA
=== Loopback Timer setup ===
15:52:06 09/17/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~260000, BACKSPACE to edit
All Line loopback timer : 000060 sec.
('0 sec.' represents doing loopback in unlimited time)
(Warning!!! line will not recover if doing loopback in unlimited time)
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to save ,pl eas e us e V -co mman d)
follows:
O > Logon
51
5.5
Bridge and RSTP Info. Setup
The full menu path for Bridge and RSTP Info. Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
E > Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press E.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
52
5.5.2 Bridge and RSTP Info Setup Procedure

The Bridge and RSTP Info Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Key in your settings.
Note: Some settings must be scrolled in with the Tab key.
Table 5-3 Bridge and RSTP Info. Setting Options
Field
Bridge
Bridge ID Priority
Bridge Max Age
Hello time
Forward Delay
Aging Time
Cost
Prio
EDG-p
P-P
Setting Options
Range is 0~65535.
Range is 4~40.
Range is 1~10.
Range is 4~30.
Range is 0~999.
Range is 1~999.
Range is 0~255
No, Yes
No, Yes
Default Setting
Note
32678
20
02
15
300
019
128
NO
NO
Key in settings
Note: Bridge max. age must be 2 x (Hello time+1) and 2 x (Forward Delay 1).
Note: EDG-p (Edge-Port): This command is used to specify an interface as an edge port.
User can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the
end of a bridged LAN or to an end node.
P-P (Link-Type P-P): A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while a
half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.
O9400SA
=== Bridge and RSTP Info Setup ===
17:43:46 09/17/2007
Designated Root MAC ADDR : 00:0E:83:15:43:40
Designated Root Priority : 24579
Designated Root Cost :
19
Root Max Age :
14 sec
Hello Time :
2 sec
Bridge ID MAC ADDR :
Bridge ID Priority :
Bridge Max Age : 20 sec
Aging time
: 300 sec
00:50:C6:00:00:11
32768
Hello Time : 02 sec
Forward Delay :
10 sec
Forward Delay : 15
sec
Port RootP State Cost Prio Edg-p P-P

----- ----- ----- ---- ---- ----- --Fec
Yes
Fwd 019 128
No
No
DCC(W) No
Dis 019 128
No
Yes
DCC(E) No
Dis 019 128
No
Yes
53

follows:
O > Logon
54
5.6
The full menu path for Gateway Network Element Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
F > Gateway Network Element Setup
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press F.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
5.6.2 Gateway Network Element Setup Procedure

The Gateway Network Element (GNE) setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to the Gateway Network Element field. use the tab key to scroll in your setting.
Setting Options are Enable or Disable. Press the Enter key.
Note: If the Gateway Network Element is set to Disable, the DHCP Relay will be cleared and
closed.
55

O940 0SA
=== Gat ewa y N etwo rk Ele ment Se tup ===
09/2 7/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, TA B/` : RO LL UP/ DOWN OP TIO NS
Gate way Ne twor k E lem ent
: Ena ble
1 6:5 0:42
<>
The following expanded screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the
various fields. Use the Tab key to select your settings.
Note: Some settings must be keyed in.
Table 5-4 Gatew ay Network Element Setting Options 1
Field
Setting Options
Lan IP Address
Lan Subnet Mask
Lan Routing Protocol
Key in IP address
Key in Subnet Mask
RIP1, RIP2, STATIC
Default Setting
Note
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
RIP2

O940 0SA
== = G atew ay Net work El eme nt S etu p = ==
16: 49: 49 0 9/2 7/2 007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : n nn.n nn. nnn .nnn , B ACK SPAC E t o e dit
Gate way Ne twor k E lem ent
: Ena ble
Lan IP Add ress
: 00 0.00 0.0 00. 000
Sy stem IP Ad dres s
: 1 92.1 68. 001 .200
Lan Sub net Mas k : 00 0.00 0.0 00. 000
Sy stem Su bne t Ma sk : 2 55.2 55. 000 .000
Lan Rou tin g Pr oto col : R IP2
The following expanded screen will appear. Select or key in your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Table 5-5 Gatew ay Network Element Setting Options 2
Field
Setting Options
Destination
Prefix
Gateway
Key in IP address
Range is 0~32
Key in Gateway
address
Default Setting
0.0.0.0
16
0.0.0.0
56
Note
O9400SA
=== Gateway Network Element Setup === 16:50:42 09/27/2007
Gateway Network Element : Enable
Lan IP Adrress : 000.000.000.000
System IP Address : 192.168.001.200
Lan Subnet Mask : 000.000.000.000
System Subnet Mask : 255.255.000.000
Lan Routing Protocol : STATIC
Num
Destination
Prefix
Gateway
01
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
02
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
03
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
04
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
05
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
06
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
07
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
08
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
09
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
10
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
11
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
12
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
13
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
14
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
15
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
16
000.000.000.000
follows:
O > Logon
57
5.7
DHCP Relay Setup
The full menu path for DHCP Relay Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
G > DHCP Relay Setup
Note: DHCP Relay is available only when the Gateway Network Element is enabled. For
instructions on enabling the GNE please refer to Section 5.6, Gateway Network
Element.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press G.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
58
5.8
DHCP Relay Setup Procedure
The DHCP Relay Setup Screen will appear. Key in the DHCP server IP address. Scroll in the
DHCP relay setting. Setting options are Enable or Disable. Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== DHCP Relay Setup ===
DHCP server IP : 000.000.000.000
DHCP relay
: Enable
17:13:12 09/27/2007
follows:
O > Logon
59
5.9
The full menu path for Remote Management Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
H > Remote Management Setup
To setup remote management, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press H.

O9400SA
10:01:58 10/23/2008
A -> System Setup

B -> Timing Source Setup
C -> Loopback Timer setup
D -> Password Setup
E -> Bridge and RSTP Info Setup
F -> Gateway Network Element Setup
G -> DHCP Relay Setup
H -> Remote Management Setup
I -> SNTP Setup
J -> RS232 Config Setup
K -> RS232 Loopback Test
L -> Hand-waving LED setup
M -> SNMP System Config Setup
N -> SSH Setup
5.9.2 Remote Management Setup Procedure

The Remote Management setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields.
60
Table 5-6 Remote Management Setup Options

Field
Setting Options
Channel Type
OFF, DCC(E)+DCC(W),
DCC(E)+InBand,
DCC(W)+InBand
3, 9, 12
DCC Bandwidth
Default Setting
Note
DCC(E)+DCC(W)
12
The figures below help to illustrate the difference in operation between a DCC (Data
Communication Channel setup and a DDC + Inband setup. Three cases are explained for
the O9400S devlce.
Case 1: DCC(E) + DCC(W)
In this case: PC1 can go through O9400S#1 to manage O9400S#2 and O9400S#3 via East
and West DCC.
Figure 5-8 DCC(E) + DCC(W)

Case 2: DCC(E) + Inband
In this case: PC1 can go through O9400S#1 to manage O9400S#2 and O9400S#3 via East
DCC and InBand Channel.
Figure 5-9 DCC(E) + Inband
61

Case 3: DCC(W) + Inband
In this case: PC1 can go through O9400S#1 to manage O9400S#2 and O9400S#3 via West
DCC and InBand Channel.
PC 1
DCC(E) + DCC(W)
O 9400S
#1
DCC
West
East
O 9400S
#3
West
E1 Inband
E1 Inband
East
O 9400S
#2
West
O
9400S
#3
DCC(E) + Inband)
Figure 5-10 DCC(W) + Inband
After all settings are scrolled in, press the Enter key.
O9400SA
=== Remote Management Setup ===
TAB or Enter key to select
17:42:52 07/16/2007
Channal Type : OFF

DCC Bandwidth : 3 Channels
O940 0SA
=== Re mot e Ma nag eme nt S etu p = ==
TAB or Ent er k ey to sele ct
17: 42:5 2 0 7/1 6/20 07
Chan nal Ty pe
: O FF
DCC Ban dwi dth : 3 Ch anne ls
Main Menu.
follows:
O > Logon
62
5.10 SNTP Setup

The full menu path for SNTP Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
I > SNTP Setup
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press I.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
63
5.10.2 SNTP Setup Procedure

The SNTP Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the various
fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Table 5-7 SNTP Setting Options
Field
Setting Options
SNTP
SNTP server 1
SNTP server 2
SNTP timezone
ON, OFF
-12 to +12
Default Setting
OFF
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
+0
Note
Key in server IP
address
Scroll in a time zone
setting See note below
Note: Timezone setting is the number of hours that you must add to or subtract from
Greenwich Mean Time to obtain your local time. The setting range is 0, +1, +2 +12, and 12, -11 -1. You can find tables on the internet that display this information.

O9400SA
=== SNTP setup ===
13:47:02 09/20/2007
SNTP ON/OFF
: OFF
SNTP server 1 : 000.000.000.000
SNTP server 2 : 000.000.000.000
SNTP timezone : +0
>> C han ge conf igu rat ion (Y/ N)? (No te: to sav e, ple ase use V- comm and )
follows:
O > Logon
64
5.11 RS232 Configuration Setup

The full menu path for RS232 Configuration setup is as follows:
O > Logon
J > RS232 Config Setup
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press J.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
65
5.11.2 RS232 Config Setup Procedure

The RS232 Config Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Note: The user must also set up a cross connect map between the SDH/SONET path and the
RS232 (port1,port2). For instructions on creating a cross connect refer to Section 5.20,
XC/TSA Create Setup, in this manual.
Table 5-8 RS232 Config Setting Options
Field
Setting Options
Node Mode
Port-1
Port-1 TS#
Port-2
Port-2 TS#
SLAVE, MASTER
ON/OFF
Range is 1~31
ON/OFF
Range is 1~31
Default Setting
Note
SLAVE
OFF
1
OFF
1

O940 0SA
= == RS23 2 C onf ig S etu p = ==
01/0 4/2 010
Node Mo de
:
Port -1 ON/ OFF:
Port -1 TS#
:
Port -2 ON/ OFF:
Port -2 TS#
:
1 0:52 :39
S lav e
O FF
01
O FF
01
#NOT E:U ser als o n eed to set XC bet wee n S DH/S ONE T p ath and RS 232( por t1,
port 2).
follows:
O > Logon
66
5.12 RS232 Loopback Test

The full menu path for RS232 Loopback Test setup is as follows:
O > Logon
K > RS232 Loopback Test

O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press K.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
67

5.12.2 RS232 Loopback Test Setup Procedure
The RS232 Loopback Test screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
RS232-1 field setting you desire. Press the Enter key. Repeat the process for the RS232-2
field.
Note: To set the Looback timer see Section 5.4, LoopbackTimer Setup, in this manual.
O940 0SA
=== RS2 32 Loop bac k T est ===
09: 16: 51 1 1/1 9/2 006
Loop bac k T imer : 000 060 sec .
RS23 2-1 : * OFF

RS23 2-2 : * OFF
TO -OP TICA L-L INE

TO -OP TICA L-L INE
TO -TR IBU TARY -LI NE

TO -TR IBU TARY -LI NE
This procedure is complete. Press the Esc. Key to return to the previous menu.
68
5.13 Hand-waving LED Setup

The full menu path for Hand-waving LED Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
L > Hand-waving LED setup

O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press F.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
69

5.13.2 Hand-waving LED Setup Procedure
The Hand-waving LED Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting.
Table 5-9 Hand-waving LED Setting Options
Field
Setting Options
Command
Timer
STOP, START
Range is 0~99999
Default Setting
Note
STOP
180

O940 0SA
=== Ha nd-w avi ng LED Set up ===
01/0 4/2 010
1 0:56 :01
Co mma nd : ST OP
Ti mer
: 00 180
( 0 : m ean s th e L ED flas hin g w ill las t f orev er aft er t he "st art" co mma nd.)
follows:
O > Logon
70
5.14 SNMP System Config Setup

The full menu path for SNMP System Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
M > SNMP System Config Setup
To setup SNMP management, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press M.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
71

5.14.2 SNMP System Configuration Setup Procedure
The SNMP System Config Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor
to the various fields.
Key a name into the Get Community field. Any name will do up to a maximum of 12
characters.
Note: Case sensitivity exists for Community field settings. If you are using Castle Rock
SNMPc in conjunction with the Looop-O9400S device, you must make sure that if the
community name is written in the lower case letters on your SNMPc screen setup it
must also be in lower case letters on the Loop screen setup. The cases (either lower
or upper) must match.
Key a name into the Set Community field. Any name will do up to a maximum of 12
characters.
Key in appropriate IP Addresses and Community names for the Trap IPs.
Use the Tab key to scroll in the Alarm Trap setting. Available choices are: ENABLE and
DISABLE.
Use the Tab key to scroll in the LED Trap setting. Available choices are: ENABLE and DISABLE.
O9400SA
=== SNMP System Config Setup ===
17:58:17 07/16/2007
[SNMP]
Get Community : public______
Set Community : private
[Trap Server]
Trap IP 1
Trap IP 2
Trap IP 3
Trap IP 4
Trap IP 5
:
:
:
:
:
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
[Trap Control]
Alarm Trap
: DISABLE
Community
Community
Community
Community
Community
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
LED Trap
:
:
:
:
:
public
public
public
public
public
: DISABLE
O9400SA
=== SNMP System Config Setup ===
18:33:27 07/16/2007
[SNMP]
Get Community : public
Set Community : private
[Trap Server]
Trap IP 1
Trap IP 2
Trap IP 3
Trap IP 4
Trap IP 5
:
:
:
:
:
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
[Trap Control]
Alarm Trap
: DISABLE
Community
Community
Community
Community
Community
LED Trap
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name
:
:
:
:
:
public
public
public
public
public
: DISABLE
Main Menu.
72

follows:
O > Logon
73
5.15 SSH Setup

The full menu path for SSH Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
N > SSH Setup
To setup SSH, press S from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The System Config Setup menu will appear. Press N.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
10:01:58 10/23/2008
System Setup
Timing Source Setup
Password Setup
DHCP Relay Setup
SNTP Setup
RS232 Config Setup
RS232 Loopback Test
SSH Setup
The SSH Setup screen will appear.

O9400SA
=== SSH Setup ===
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
10:02:37 10/23/2008
SSH Server : OFF
Use the arrow keys to move your cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in the setting.
74
Table 5-10 SSH Serttings

Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
SSH Server
ON, OFF
OFF
75
Note
5.16 SDH/SONET Mode Setup

The full menu path for SDH/SONET Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
A > System Setup
To setup the SDH/SONET configuration mode, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press A.

O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Config Setup ===
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:21:07 07/17/2007
SDH/SONET Mode Setup

SDH/SONET Protection Setup
ALS/APSD Setup
SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
XC/TSA Map Configuration
SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
Customer information Setup
5.16.2 SDH/SONET Mode Setup Procedure

The SDH/SONET Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to
the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in the Rate and Mode settings.
76

Table 5-11 SDH/SONET Mode Settings
Field
Setting Options
Rate
Mode
Implicit Bypass XC:
STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12

ADM(SNCP), 2TM, TM1+1
Enable, Disable
Default Setting
Note
STM-4
ADM(SNCP)
Enable
Note: When you change the mode settings, the available line side settings will also be
changed. Please refer to table below.
Table 5-12 SDH/SONET Line Side Settings
Field
Setting Options
ADM
2TM
TM1+1
Ea or Wa *
Ea or Wa
Ea
Default Setting
Note
Note: * Ea denotes East and Wa denotes West.

O940 0SA
== = S DH/S ONE T M ode Set up ===
09/0 4/2 009
Rate
Mode
:
:
1 0:17 :45
S TM1
A DM( SNC P)
Impl ici t B ypas s X C:
Ena ble
Note: Implicit Bypass XC can only be used in ADM mode. If enabled, it allows signals to
pass through the device (East to West bi-direction only).
Note: A warning will appear on your screen to remind you that if you change the settings and
save them they will become the new default settings.
O940 0SA
== = S DH/S ONE T M ode Set up ===
09/0 4/2 009
Rate
Mode
:
:
1 0:17 :45
S TM1
A DM( SNC P)
Impl ici t B ypas s X C:
Ena ble
Warn ing !!! !Sys tem wi ll b e l oad ed d efa ult ,aft er you cha nge th ese set tin gs.
You will be returned to the SDH/SONET Config Setup menu. Press the ESC key to return to
the Main Menu
follows:
O > Logon
77

78
5.17 SDH/SONET Protection Setup

The full menu path for SDH/SONET Protection Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
B > SDH/SONET Protection Setup
To setup SDH/SONET protection, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press B.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:21:07 07/17/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
5.17.2 SDH/SONET Protection Setup Procedure

The SDH/SONET Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to
the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
79
Table 5-13 SDH/SONET Protection Setting Options

Field
Setting Options
Type
MSP1+1, SNCP
Setting
Options
MSP1+1 Setting
Options
MSP1+1
Default
Setting
SNCP
Setting
Options
SNCP
Default
Setting
Protection
Revertive
ON, OFF
Revertive, Nonrevertive
ON
Non-revertive
ON
Non-revertive
Direction
Uni-direction, Bidirection
--
Uni-direction
ON
Revertive,
Nonrevertive
-SNCP/I,
SNCP/N
SNCP/I
3~900
300
Mode
WTR
Timer(s)
Note
--
--
--
--

O940 0SA
== = S DH/ SONE T P rot ecti on Set up = ==
07/1 7/2 007
1 1:48 :44
---- --- Pro tect ion Se tup- --Type

:MSP 1+1
Prot ect ion :ON
Reve rti ve :Non -re ver tive
Dire cti on :Uni -di rec tion
O940 0SA
== = S DH/ SONE T P rot ecti on Set up = ==
07/1 7/2 007
1 1:48 :44
---- --- Pro tect ion Se tup- --Type

:MSP 1+1
Prot ect ion :ON
Reve rti ve :Non -re ver tive
Dire cti on :Uni -di rec tion
Note: The sample screen shown below is for MSP1+1.
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Protection Setup ===
09:47:29 04/16/2009
-------Protection Setup---Type
:MSP1+1
Protection :ON
Revertive
:Non-revertive
Direction
:Uni-direction
WTR Timer(S):300
the Main Menu.
80

follows:
O > Logon
81
5.18 ALS/APSD Setup

The full menu path for ALS/APSD Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
C > ALS/APSD Setup

To setup ALS/APSD, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press C.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:21:07 07/17/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
82

5.18.2 ALS/APSD Setup Procedure
The ALS/APSD Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the
Table 5-14 ALS/APSD Setting Options
Field
Setting Options
Ea laser power
Wa laser power
Ea ALS enable
Wa ALS enable
Automatic restart sec)
Ea manual restart
Wa manual restart
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
60-300
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
Default Setting
Note
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
300
OFF
OFF

O940 0SA
== = A LS/A PSD Se tup ===
1 0:0 3:44 10 /23 /200 8
Ea l ase r p ower : ON
Wa l ase r p ower : ON
Ea A LS ena ble : O FF
Wa A LS ena ble : O FF
puls e r epe titi on tim e fo r a uto mati c r est art( sec ) : 300
Ea m anu al rest art : OFF
Wa m anu al rest art : OFF
A prompt will ask Are you Sure? (Y/N) Press Y for yes. You will be returned to the previous
menu.
>>Ar e y ou sure (Y /N) ?
This procedure is complete.

The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor
to STORE. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you wish to store this configuration.
Press Y for yes.
83
5.19 SDH/SONET Granularity Setup

The full menu path for SDH/SONET Protection Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
D > SDH/SONET Granularity Setup
To setup SDH/SONET Granularity, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press D.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:21:07 07/17/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
84

5.19.2 SDH/SONET Granularity Setup Procedure
The SDH/SONET Granularity Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your
cursor to the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Table 5-15 SDH/SONET Granularity Setting Options

Field
AUG1# (SDH)
STS3# (SONET)
Setting Options
Default Setting
--
Field
Note
Setting is automatic and
depends on the
SDH/SONET rate.
--
Setting Options
Default Setting
AU4-TUG3,
AU3-3, VC4
AU4-TUG3
Setting Options
Default Setting
AU4-TUG3
AU3-3
VC4
TU3, TU11, TU12

AU3, TU11, TU12
BYPASS
TU12
TU12
BYPASS
Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
Note
HO-Path Granularity
STS3, STS3C
STS3
SDH
HO-Path Granularity
SDH
LO-Path#1 Granularity
LO-Path #3 Granularity
SONET
SONET
LO-Path #3 Granularity
Field
Field
STS3
STS3C
Note
Setting Options
Default Setting
STS1, VT2, VT15

BYPASS
VT2
BYPASS

This is a sample SDH screen at STM-1 rate.
O940 0SA
== = SD H/S ONE T Gr anu lar ity Set up ===
1 7:0 8:26 09 /20 /200 7
==== === === ==== === === ==== === === EAS T = === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
AUG1 #
: 1
HO-P ath
Gran ula rit y : AU4 -TU G3
LO-P ath #1 Gran ula rit y : TU1 2
LO-P ath #2 Gran ula rit y : TU1 2
LO-p ath #3 Gran ula rit y : TU1 2
This is a sample SONET screen at OC-12 rate.

O940 0SA
=== SD H/S ONET Gr anu lari ty Set up = ==
10/0 1/2 007
==== === === ==== === === ==== === === EAS T
STS3 #
: 1
STS3
Gra nula rit y
: STS 3
STS1 #1 Gra nula rit y
: VT1 5
: VT1 5
: VT1 5
1 2:37 :02
= === ==== === === ==== === === ==== === === ==
2
3
4
S TS3
ST S3
STS3
V T15
VT 15
VT15
V T15
VT 15
VT15
V T15
VT 15
VT15
<>.
85

the Main Menu.
follows:
O > Logon
86
5.20 XC/TSA Create Setup

The full menu path for XC/TSA Create Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
E > XC/TSA Create Setup
To setup a TSA cross connect, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press E.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:21:07 07/17/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
87
5.20.2 XC/TSA Create Setup

The XC/TSA Create Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting for the
Granularity field. Setting options are: TU3, AU3/C3, TU11, TU12, and AU4/C4.
Table 5-16 XC/TSA Setting Options
System Mode
Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
STM-1, STM-4
Granularity
TU12
OC-3, OC-12
Granularity
TU3, TU11, TU12,

AU3/C3, AU4/C4
STS1, STS3C, VT2,
VT15
Note
VT2

O9400SA
=== XC/TSA Create Setup ===
Granularity
: TU12
11:04:14 03/26/2008
An expanded screen will appear as shown below. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to
the various fields. Use the Tab key to scroll in the your settings.
O9400SA
11:04:14 03/26/2008
Granularity
: TU12
Map
: map1
------------------------------- Source ------------------------------------From Unit
: East
From AUG1 : 1
From TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
Count
: 01
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
------------------------------- Destination -------------------------------To Unit
: East
To AUG1
: 1
To TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
XC Type
: Uni-Xc
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3
VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21
:
:
:
:
Source
o o o
o o o
o o o
-> East
AUG1#1 Timeslot Available
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3
VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21
:
:
:
:
Destination -> East

o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
88
Table 5-17 XC/TSA Create Setup Setting Options

Field
Setting Options
Active Map
SDH
From unit
Source
AUG1#
TS VC3
TS VC1x
Count Setting
SONET
Source
map1, map2
East, West, TG1,TG2, TG3,
Inband, Async
TU3
AU3/C3
AU4/C4
TU11
TU12
TG2 and TG3 available only if device

is equipped with those options
Default setting is East
Default setting is 1
XC Type
Uni-Xc, Bi-Xc,
A&D, PP-A&D
Default setting is Uni-Xc
From unit
East, West, TG1, TG2,

TG3, Inband, RS232
TG2 and TG3 available only if device

is equipped with those options
Default setting is East
STS3
TSSTS1
TS VTxx
Count Setting
Range is 1~4 **
Range is 1~3
Range is 1~28
1
Range is 1~3
Range is 1~84
Range is 1~63
STS3C
STS1
VT15
VT2
XC Type
Destinati
on
Range is 1~4 **
Range is 1~3*
Range is 1~28*
Range is 1~3
Range is 1~3
1
Range is 1~84
Range is 1~63
Note
Uni-Xc, Bi-Xc,
A&D, PP-A&D
Default setting is 1
Default setting is Uni-Xc
Destination setting options are the same as the source setting options
* Note: Available VC1x and VC3 setting options depend on SDH/SONET Granularity.
**Note: This setting depends on the SDH/SONET rate.
Note: - means timeslot is not available.
o means timeslot is unused
x means timeslot is used
Note: You cannot cross AUG1 (or STS3) boundaries when setting up an XC/TSA map.
Because of this, you can only set up one AUG1 at a time.
A sample map setup screen is shown below. Press the Enter key when your mapping is
complete.
89

O9400SA
11:09:50 03/26/2008
Granularity
: TU12
Map
: map1
------------------------------- Source ------------------------------------From Unit
: East
From AUG1 : 1
From TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
Count
: 10
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
: East
To AUG1
: 1
To TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
XC Type
: Uni-Xc
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3
VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21
:
:
:
:
Source
o o o
o o o
o o o
-> East
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3
VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21
:
:
:
:
Destination -> East

x x x
x x x
x x x
x o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
A prompt will ask Are you sure (Y/N)? Press Y for yes.
Your new map will appear as shown below. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Main
Menu.
O9400SA
11:09:50 03/26/2008
Granularity
: TU12
Map
: map1
------------------------------- Source ------------------------------------From Unit
: East
From AUG1 : 1
From TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
Count
: 10
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
: East
To AUG1
: 1
To TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
XC Type
: Uni-Xc
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3
VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21
:
:
:
:
Source
o o o
o o o
o o o
-> East
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3
VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21
:
:
:
:
Destination -> East

x x x
x x x
x x x
x o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
Note: The setup will take about 5 to 10 minutes to be applied. Please check the LCAS status
in the unit menu (of Ethernet cards) to confirm that the setup is successful. The path is as
follows:
Enter the unit menu (please refer to 5.42.2 or 5.43.2)
(C) WAN (VCG) & Link Display
(D) LCAS Channel Status
90

The LCAS Channel Status:
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== LCAS Channel Status ===
09:39:31 04/23/2010
VCG: 1 Direction: Source
Member State
Member State
------ ------- ------ ------01 :
NORM
02 :
NORM
05 :
NORM
06 :
NORM
09 :
NORM
10 :
NORM
13 :
NORM
14 :
NORM
17 :
NORM
18 :
NORM
21 :
NORM
22 :
NORM
25 :
NORM
26 :
NORM
29 :
NORM
30 :
NORM
33 :
NORM
34 :
NORM
37 :
NORM
38 :
NORM
41 :
NORM
42 :
NORM
45 :
NORM
46 :
NORM
49 :
NORM
50 :
NORM
53 :
NORM
54 :
NORM
57 :
NORM
58 :
NORM
61 :
NORM
62 :
NORM
Member
-----03 :
07 :
11 :
15 :
19 :
23 :
27 :
31 :
35 :
39 :
43 :
47 :
51 :
55 :
59 :
63 :
State
------NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
EOS
Member
-----04 :
08 :
12 :
16 :
20 :
24 :
28 :
32 :
36 :
40 :
44 :
48 :
52 :
56 :
60 :
State
------NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
NORM
The abbreviations and the remarks are listed below:

Table 5-18 LCAS Status Abbreviations and Remark
LCAS Status Abbreviations
none-LCAS
ADD
NORM
EoS
IDLE
DNU
Remarks
This is an indication that this end uses fixed bandwidth
This member is about to be added to the group
Normal transmission
End of Sequence indication and Normal transmission
This member is not part of the group or about to be removed
Do Not Use (the payload), the sink side reported FAIL status
91
5.21 XC/TSA Delete Setup

O > Logon
F > XC/TSA Delete Setup
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press F.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:21:07 07/17/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
92
5.21.2 XC/TSA Delete Setup

The XC/TSA Delete Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move your cursor to the
Table 5-19 XC/TSA Delete Setting Options

Field
Active Map
SDH Source
From unit
AUG1#
TS VC3
TS VC1x
Count Setting
TU3
AU3/C3
AU4/C4
TU11
TU12
Setting
Options
Default
Setting
map1, map2
East, West, TG1,
Inband, Async
Range is 1~4 **
Range is 1~3*
Range is 1~28*
Range is 1~3
map1
Range is 1~4**
Range is 1~84
Range is 1~63
STS3
SONET
Range is 1~4 **
1
Range is 1~3*
1
Range is 1~28*
STS1
Range is 1~3
VT2
Range is 1~63
VT15
Range is 1~84
Destination setting options are the same as the source setting options
TS VC3/AUG3
TS VTxx
Count Setting
Destination
* Note: Available VC1x and VC3 setting options depend on SDH/SONET Granularity.
**Note: This setting depends on the SDH/SONET rate.
After selecting all of your settings, press the Enter key.

O9400SA
=== XC/TSA Delete Setup ===
Map
12:10:28 03/28/2008
: map1
Count
: 01
------------------------------- Destination -------------------------------To Slot
: East
To AUG1
: 1
To TS
: 1 -VC3/TUG3 01 -VC1x
KLM
: [ TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU12#1 ]
VC3/TUG3
#1
#2
#3
VC1x
01~21
01~21
01~21
:
:
:
:
Destination -> East

o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
A prompt will ask Are you sure (Y/N)? Press Y for yes.
A further prompt will appear that says the deletion was successful.
>>De let e S ucce ss!
This procedure is now complete.
93
o o o
o o o
o o o
Note
5.22 XC/TSA Map Configuration

O > Logon
G > XC/TSA Map Configuration
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press G.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:21:07 07/17/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
94

5.22.2 XC/TSA Map Configuration Setup
The XC/TSA Map Configuration Setup screen will appear as shown below.
O9400SA
=== XC/TSA MAP Configuration ===
10:23:15 09/21/2007
A -> Map Change

B -> Map Delete
C -> Map Copy
A Map Change
Press A to select the Map Change screen
O9400SA
=== MAP Change ===
10:30:54 09/21/2007
Current Active Map: map1

Change Current Active Map to map2 (Y/N)?
A prompt will ask if you are sure. Press Y for yes.

>>Are you sure (Y/N)?
Key in your password. Press the Enter key. This procedure is complete.
==>> Enter password :
B Map Delete
Press B to select the Map Delete screen. Use the tab key to scroll in either map1 or map2 as
your setting. Press the Enter key.
O9400SA
TAB or Enter key to select
=== Map Delete ===
10:41:05 09/21/2007
Delete All TSA in map2


C Map Copy
Press C to select the Map Copy screen. To copy the Active Map to map1 press the Enter
key.
O9400SA
=== TSA Map Copy ===
10:44:25 09/21/2007
Copy Active Map to the Other Map: map2->map1

Copy Active Map to map1 (Y/N)?

95
5.23 SDH/SONET Overhead Setup

O > Logon
H -> SDH/SONET Overhead Setup

O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press H.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:21:07 07/17/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
96

5.23.2 SDH/SONET Overhead Setup
The SDH/SONET Overhead Setup screen will appear as shown below.
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Overhead Setup ===
11:30:45 09/21/2007
A -> SDH/SONET Line Overhead Setup

B -> Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup
A SDH/SONET Line Overhead Setup

Press A to select the SDH/SONET Line Overhead screen. Use the Tab key to scroll in a Line
Side setting. Press the Enter key.
Table 5-20 SDH/SONET Overhead Line Side Setting Options

System
Mode
STM-1
STM-4
OC-3
OC-12
Field
Line
Side
Setting Options
If SDH/SONET is
in ADM or 2TM
mode
Default
Setting
Ea, Wa
Ea
Setting Options
If SDH/SONET is
in TM1+1 mode
Ea, Eb
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Line Overhead Setup ===
Line Side : Ea
Default
Setting
Note
Ea
11:34:26 09/21/2007
An expanded screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields.
Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Table 5-21 Additional SDH/SONET Overhead Setting Options

System Mode
STM-1
STM-4
OC-3
OC-12
Field
J0_LEN
Exoect_J0_M
TX_J0_MSG
RX_J0_MSG
Setting Options
NULL, 1-Byte,
16-byte (NULL padding),
16-byte (SPACE padding)
0~0xFF (key in)
0~0xFF (key in)
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Line Overhead Setup ===
Line Side : Ea
J0_LEN
Expect_J0_MSG
TX_J0_MSG
RX_J0_MSG
: 16-BYTE (NULL padding)

:
:
:
97
Default
Setting
NULL
Key in message
Key in message
11:51:52 09/21/2007
Note

B Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup
Press B to select the Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup screen. Use the Tab key to scroll in
a Line Side setting. Press the Enter key.
Table 5-22 Ho-Path/STS-Path Line Side Setting Options

System
Mode
STM-1
STM-4
Field
Line Side
Line Side
Setting
Options
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
Ea, Eb
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
Ea, Eb
AUG1#
VC3#
OC-3
OC-12
Ea, Wa
Ea, Wa
1~4
1~3*
Line Side
Line Side
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
Ea, Eb
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
Ea, Eb
STS3#
STS1#
Ea, Wa
Ea, Wa
1~4
1~3*
Default
Setting
Note
Ea
Ea
Ea
Ea
1
1
Ea
Ea
Ea
Ea
1
1
* NOTE: VC3# and STS1# are only available when the granularity of AUG1/STS3 is AU#-3
and STS3 respectively.
O9400SA
=== Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup === 10:52:08 05/27/2009

Line Side : Ea
AUG1# : 1
An expanded screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields.
Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Table 5-23 Additional Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setting Options

System Mode
Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
AUG#1
1 (for STM-1/OC-3),
1~4 (for STM-4/OC-12)
NULL, 16-BYTE (NULL padding),
16-BYTE (Space padding),
64-BYTE (NULL padding),
64-BYTE (Space padding)
Key in message
Key in message
0~0xFF (key in)
0~0xFF (key in)

Fixed
J1_LEN
Expect_J1_MSG
TX_J1_MSG
RX_J1_MSG
HP-TxPSL
HP-EPSL
HP-RxPSL
98
NULL
Note
O9400SA
=== Ho-Path/STS-Path Overhead Setup === 13:29:30 12/02/2009

Line Side : Ea
J1_LEN : NULL
Expect_J1_MSG :
TX_J1_MSG :
RX_J1_MSG :
HP-TxPSL : 2
( TUG )
HP-EPSL : 2
( TUG )
HP-RxPSL : ff
( VC-AIS )
Press the ESC key twice to return to the Main Menu.

follows:
O > Logon
99
5.24 Line Loopback Setup

The O9400S provides the following diagnostic loopbacks:
Receive line interface looped back to the transmit line interface
Transmit line interfae looped back to the receive line interface

They are shown in Figure 5-11 below.
Figure 5-11 O9400S Loopback Diagram

1 To-optical Line Loopback is illustrated in Figure 5-11. The incoming STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) line
signal is looped back to the outgoing STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) signal before the SDH/SONET
transceiver framer. This loopback is used to isolate the local equipment from a troubled STM1/4 (OC-3/12) transmission line. Line loopback test can be activated from the terminal.
2 To-tributary Line Loopback is illustrated in Figure 5-11. The outgoing STM-1/4 (OC-3/12)
signal is looped back through the transceiver. All STM-1/4 (OC-3/12) signals are looped back
to the receiver path. This loopback test is activated by the Test command. This loopback test
can be used with the PRBS diagnostic test pattern to validate the local O9400's integrity.
The full menu path Line Loopback Setup is as follows:

O > Logon
I > Line Loopback Setup
A screen by screen setup example is shown on the next page.
100

O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press I.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:21:07 07/17/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
5.24.2 Line Loopback Setup

The Line Loopback Setup screen will appear as shown below. Press A.
O9400SA
=== Line Loopback Setup ===
12:53:31 09/21/2007
A -> Line Loopback Test
101

The following screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the East Side
Line setting you require. Press the Enter key. An asterisk will appear besides the setting you
selected.
Repeat this process for the West Side Line setting. This procedure is complete.
O9400SA
=== Line Loopback Test ===
12:54:23 09/21/2007
Loopback Timer : 000060 sec.
East Side Line : *OFF

West Side Line : *OFF
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-TRIBUTARY-LINE
TO-TRIBUTARY-LINE

Note: Line loopbacks are unsuitable for testing MSP protection.
.
The following screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the East Side
Line setting you require. Press the Enter key. An asterisk will appear besides the setting you
selected.
Repeat this process for the West Side Line setting. This procedure is complete.
O9400SA
=== Line Loopback Test ===
Loopback Timer : 000060 sec.
East Side Line : *OFF

West Side Line : *OFF
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-TRIBUTARY-LINE
TO-TRIBUTARY-LINE
102
12:54:23 09/21/2007
5.25 MSP USER Command

The full menu path for MSP USER Command is as follows:
O > Logon
J > MSP USER Command

To setup Customer Information, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press J.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
09:55:49 09/07/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
103

5.25.2 MSP Command
The MSP Command screen will appear.
O9400SA
=== MSP User Command ===
15:02:16 11/27/2007
MSP Cmd :FS-Eb

Active Port : Ea
Current Tx K1: 0x00
Current Tx K2: 0x00
Current Rx K1: 0x00
Current Rx K2: 0x00
Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch
LOP = Lockout of Protection
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the MSP Cmd field. Use the Tab key to scroll in
your settings.
Note: MSP USER Command is available only when system mode is TM 1+1 and protection
mode is enabled.
Command settings are listed in the table below. Some commands have higher priorities than
others. If the command you select has a lower priority than the existing setting, your selection
will be rejected. If you want to use a setting with a lower priority, use the clear command first.
This will clear the existing setting and allow you to choose a lower priority setting.
Table 5-24 MSP Command Settings
Priority
MSP Command Settings

Setting
Description
1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)
Clear
Lock-out
FS-Ea
FS-Eb
MS-Ea
MS-Eb
Clear any existing setting

Lock out protection
Force switch to East side(Ea)
Force switch to West side (Eb)
Manual switch to East side (Ea)
Manual switch to West side (Eb)

A new prompt will appear to tell you that the user command is okay.
User Command OK!
104
5.26 Customer Information Setup

The full menu path for Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
K > Customer information Setup

To setup Customer Information, press D from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Config Setup menu will appear. Press K.

O9400SA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
09:55:49 09/07/2007

ALS/APSD Setup
XC/TSA Create Setup
XC/TSA Delete Setup
Line Loopback Setup
MSP USER Command
105

5.26.2 Customer Information Setup Procedure
The following screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields.
Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
= == C ust ome r In for mat ion Set up ===
1 3:1 6:57 09 /21 /200 7
Port #
Ea
Wa/E b
C usto mer In form ati on

S DH-L ine ___ ____ ___ __
S DH-L ine
Press the ESC key twice to return to the Main Menu.

follows:
O > Logon
106
5.27 Alarm Setup

There are eight different types of alarm setup screens for the O9400S
The initial menu path for Alarm Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
From that point, the path to setup a specific alarm will be one of the following:
B > SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
C > Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
D > Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
E > SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup
F > SD/SF Threshold Setup
To setup an alarm, press M from the Main Menu.

O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The Alarm Setup screen will appear. Press the appropriate letter to select the setup screen
you require.
O9400SA
=== Alarm Setup ===
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
15:48:29 08/02/2007
System Alarm Setup

SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup
SD/SF Threshold Setup
External Alarm Setup
Insert AIS Alarm Setup
107

5.27.2 System Alarm Setup
The menu path for System Alarm Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting.
Table 5-25 System Alarm Setting Options

Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
ALARM
RELAY
ENABLED, DISABLED
ENABLED, DISABLED
ENABLED
Note
Parameter
Alarm
Setting
Options
Default
Alarm
Settting
Relay
Setting
Options
Default
Relay
Settting
Severity
Setting
Options
Default
Severity
Settting
Alm Cut Off

Power Loss
TS Sync
Loss
SNCP Switch
MSP Switch
Login/Logout
FOM
Equip/Uneq
SFP Tx Fail
SFP Rx Fail
SFP
Temperature
ENABLED,
DISABLE
ENABLED
ENABLED,
DISABLE
DISABLED
MINR,
MAJR,
INFO,
CRIT
INFO
MAJR
MINR
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
Note: The Relay for the Alm Cut Off is always disabled.
O9400SA
=== System Alarm Setup ===
ALARM:ENABLED
RELAY:ENABLED
Type
-------Alm Cut Off
Power Loss
TS Sync Loss
SNCP Switch
MSP Switch
Login/Logout
FOM Equip/Uneq
SFP Tx Fail
SFP Rx Fail
SFP Temperature
Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
Relay
-------DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
12:56:58 11/21/2007
Severity
-------INFO
MAJR
MINR
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
MINR
(CRIT:CRITICAL, MAJR:MAJOR, MINR:MINOR, INFO:INFORM)

5.27.3 SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

The menu path for Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is:
108
Note

O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
B > SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Use the Tab key to scroll in a Line Side setting.
Note: The sample setup screen below is from a device in ADM mode. The mode that a
device is in determines what the available settings are for Line Side. The following
table details the Line Side settings for each of the five modes.
Table 5-26 SDH-Line/SONET-Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setting Options

Mode
ADM
2TM
TM1+1
Line Side Setting Options
Default Setting
Ea or Wa *
Ea or Wa
Ea
Ea
Note
* Ea denotes East and Wa denotes West.
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Line Side : Ea
===
15:52:52 08/02/2007
The following screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter
key. The available setting choices are: ENABLED, DISABLED.
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Line Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ===14:31:57 03/21/2008
Line Side : Ea
Type
-------PI-LOS
RS-LOF
RS-TIM
RS-BIP
MS-SD
MS-SF
MS-AIS
MS-RDI
MS-BIP
MS-REI
Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
Relay
-------DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
5.27.4 Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

The menu path for Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
C > Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
109
Table 5-27 Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setting Options

System
Mode
STM-1
Field
Line Side
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
VC3#
STM-4
Line Side
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
Ea, Eb
Ea, Wa
Ea, Eb
1~4
1~3*
Line Side
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
STS1#
OC-12
Ea, Wa
1~3*
AUG1#
VC3#
OC-3
Setting
Options
Ea, Wa
Ea, Eb
1~3*
Line Side
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
STS3#
STS1#
Ea, Wa
Ea, Eb
1~4
1~3*
Default
Setting
Note
Ea
Ea
1
Ea
Ea
1
1
Ea
Ea
1
Ea
Ea
1
1
* NOTE: VC3# and STS1# are only available when the granularity of AUG1/STS3 is AU#-3
O9400SA
=== Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup 15:53:29 08/02/2007
Line Side : Ea
AUG1# : 1
The following screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter
key. The available setting choices are: ENABLED, DISABLED.
O9400SA
=== Ho-Path/STS-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup 14:34:03 03/21/2008
Line Side : Ea
AUG1# : 1
Type
-------AU-LOP
AU-AIS
HP-SD
HP-SF
HP-TIM
HP-UNEQ
HP-PLM
HP-RDI-S
HP-RDI-C
HP-RDI-P
HP-B3-BIP
HP-REI
HP-LOM
Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
Relay
-------DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
110
5.27.5 Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

The menu path for Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
D > Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use the Tab key to scroll in your Line Side setting.
Table 5-28 Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setting Options

System
Mode
STM-1
Field
Line Side
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
VC1x
STM-4
Line Side
Line Side
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
Line Side
STS3#
STS1#
VTxx
Ea, Wa
Ea, Eb
1~4
1~3*
1~28**
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
STS1#
VTxx
OC-12
Ea, Wa
Ea, Eb
1~28**
AUG1#
VC3#
VC1x
OC-3
Setting
Options
Ea, Wa
Ea, Eb
1~3*
1~28**
in ATM or 2TM mode

in TM1+1 mode
Ea, Wa
Ea, Eb
1~4
1~3*
1~28**
Default
Setting
Note
Ea
Ea
1
Ea
Ea
1
1
1
Ea
Ea
1
1
Ea
Ea
1
1
1
NOTE: VC3# and STS1# are only available when the granularity of AUG1/STS3 is AU#-3
**NOTE: This setting depends on the granularity of VC1x/VTxx.
O9400SA
ARROW KEYS:
Line Side :
VC3# :
VC1x# :
=== Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup 15:53:55 08/02/2007

CURSOR MOVE, TAB/`: ROLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS
Ea
AUG1# : 1
1 (TU12)
01 ( TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU1x#1 )
111

O9400SA
=== Lo-Path/VT-Path Alarm Mask/Relay Setup 13:45:05 09/04/2009
Line Side : Ea
VC3# : 1 (TU12)
(TU12) :01 ( TUG3#1, TUG2#1, TU1x#1 )
Type
Alarm
Relay
--------------- -------TU-LOP
ENABLED DISABLED
TU-AIS
ENABLED DISABLED
LP-SD
ENABLED DISABLED
LP-SF
ENABLED DISABLED
LP-UNEQ
ENABLED DISABLED
Copy the same config. from VC12#01 to VC12#01

5.27.6 SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup

The menu path for SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
E > SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup
There are thirty-five alarm types on this screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use
the Tab key to scroll in your setting.
The setting choices available are: MINR, MAJR, INFO or CRIT
O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Alarm Severity Setup === 14:35:06 03/21/2008
Line Type Severity

--------------------PI-LOS
CRIT
RS-LOF
CRIT
RS-TIM
MINR
RS-BIP
MINR
MS-SD
CRIT
MS-SF
CRIT
MS-AIS
MAJR
MS-RDI
MINR
MS-BIP
MINR
MS-REI
MINR
HP Type
Severity
--------------------AU-LOP
MAJR
AU-AIS
MAJR
HP-SD
MAJR
HP-SF
MAJR
HP-TIM
MINR
HP-UNEQ
MINR
HP-PLM
MINR
HP-RDI-S
MINR
HP-RDI-C
MINR
HP-RDI-P
MINR
HP-B3-BIP MINR
HP-REI
MINR
HP-LOM
MAJR

112
LP Type
Severity
--------------------TU-LOP
MAJR
TU-AIS
MAJR
LP-SD
MAJR
LP-SF
MAJR
LP-TIM
MINR
LP-UNEQ
MINR
LP-PLM
MINR
LP-RDI-S
MINR
LP-RDI-C
MINR
LP-RDI-P
MINR
LP-BIP
MINR
LP-REI
MINR
5.27.7 SD/SF Threshold Setup

The menu path for SD/SF Threshold Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
F > SD/SF Threshold Setup
There six alarm types on this screen. The setting choices available are shown in the table
below.
Table 5-29 SD/SF Threshold Settings
Alarm Type
MS-SD 1EMS-SF 1EHP-SD 1EHP-SF 1ELP-SD 1ELP-SF 1E-
Threshold Setting Choices

3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9
3, 4, 5, 6
3, 4, 5, 6
Note: Threshold settings are easily converted to the BER (Bit Error Rate). See table below.
Table 5-30 Threshold to Bit Error Rate Conversion Table
Threshold Setting
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit Error Rate

10-3 (.001)
10-4 (.0001)
10-5 (.00001)
10-6 (.000001)
10-7 (.0000001)
10-8 (.00000001)
10-9 (.000000001)
O9400SA
=== SD/SF Threshold Setup ===
Type
-------MS-SD
MS-SF
HP-SD
HP-SF
LP-SD
LP-SF
Threshold
--------1E-5
1E-3
1E-5
1E-3
1E-5
1E-3
113
15:55:13 08/02/2007
5.27.8 External Alarm Setup

The menu path for External Alarm Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
There are four external alarms on this screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor. Use
the Tab key to scroll in your alarm, relay and severity settings.
Setting choices are illustrated in the table below.
Table 5-31 External Alarm Setting Options
External
Alarm
Ext. Alarm1
Ext. Alarm2
Ext. Alarm3
Ext.l Alarm4
Alarm
Setting
Options
Alarm
Default
Setting
Relay
Setting
Options
Relay
Default
Setting
ENABLED,
DISABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED,
DISABLED
DISABLED
Severity
Setting
Options
MINR
MAJR
INFO
CRIT
Severity
Default
Setting
INFO
The message field is used for keying in any info. you want (ie. perhaps the name of the place
where the remote unit is located)
O9400SA
=== External Alarm Setup ===
External
External
External
External
alarm
Alarm1:ENABLED
Alarm2:ENABLED
Alarm3:ENABLED
Alarm4:ENABLED
relay
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
severity
INFO
INFO
MINR
MAJR
message
external
external
external
external
15:55:39 08/02/2007
alarm1
alarm2
alarm3
alarm4

5.27.9 Insert AIS Alarm Setup

The menu path for Insert AIS Alarm Setup is:
O > Logon
M > Alarm Setup
There are thirteen alarms on this screen. Use the Tab key to scroll in the settings. The
available setting choices are: ENABLED or DISABLED.
114
Message

O940 0SA
= == Line In ser t AI S A lar m Se tup == =
T ype
- --- --- R S-T IM to
M S-A IS to
A U-L OP to
A U-A IS to
HP -UN EQ to
H P-T IM to
H P-L OM to
H P-P LM to
T U-L OP to
T U-A IS to
LP -UN EQ to
L P-T IM to
L P-P LM to
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
A IS
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
A larm
- ---- --E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
E NABL ED
115
15: 56: 11 0 8/0 2/2 007
5.28 Clear Performance Data

The full menu path for Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
A screen-by-screen setup example is shown below.
To setup Performance, press R from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu will appear. Press A.

O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear ===10:19:20 08/03/2007
A -> Clear Performance Data

B -> Performance Threshold Setup
5.28.2 Clear Performance Procedure

The Clear Performance Data screen will appear. A prompt will ask if you are sure you want to
clear the data. Press Y for yes. The data will be cleared and you will be returned to the
previous screen. This procedure is complete.
O9400SA
=== Clear Performance Data ===
>> Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?
116
17:03:55 09/24/2007
5.29 SDH/SONET Performance Report

5.29.1 1-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for SDH/SONET one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Performance
O9400SA
=== 1-Hour Performance ===
Ea RS-BIP(B1)
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval : 0 seconds
Current 15-Min Interval

1st Nearest 15-Min Interval
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval
:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
0
---------------------
(BBE)
0
---------------------
(ES)
0
---------------------
17:11:38 11/19/2009
(BES)
0
---------------------
(SES)
0
---------------------
(UAS)
0
---------------------
<< Press TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
5.29.2 24-Hour Performance Report

The full menu path for SDH/SONET 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Performance
O9400SA
17:12:34 11/19/2009
Ea EB RS-BIP(B1)
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 0
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96
, Last 96
(16:45) >
(14:45) >
(12:45) >
(10:45) >
(08:45) >
(06:45) >
(04:45) >
(02:45) >
(00:45) >
(22:45) >
(20:45) >
(18:45) >
15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------

117
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------

5.29.3 7-Day Performance Report
The full menu path for SDH/SONET 7 Day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
P > Performance
O9400SA
=== 7-Day Performance ===
Ea RS-BIP(B1)
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current Day : 0
Current Day
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009
11/12/2009
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
-----------------------------------------
(BBE)
-----------------------------------------
(ES)
-----------------------------------------
17:13:09 11/19/2009
(BES)
-----------------------------------------
(SES)
-----------------------------------------
(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

Note: The maximum value for line ES, BES, SES, UAS, and BPV is 65,535, respectively.
118
5.30 Performance TCA Setup

The full menu path for Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
B > Performance TCA Setup
To setup Performance, press R from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu will appear. Press B.

O9400SA
=== SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear ===10:19:20 08/03/2007

5.30.2 Performance TCA Setup Procedure

The Performance TCA Setup screen will appear. There are five performance fields. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to each field.
Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings for Alarm. Available choices are :
ENABLE and DISABLE.
119

Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings for Severity. Available choices are:
MINR, MAJR, INFO and CRIT.
Key in the value you wish to use for the Threshold level. Values range from 19999 BIP Error
Rate.
O9400SA
=== Performance TCA Setup ===
Type
-------RS-BIP
MS-BIP
MS-REI
HP-B3-BIP
HP-REI
Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
Severity
-------MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
Threshold
--------2400
2400
2400
2400
2400
120
10:21:54 08/03/2007
5.31 Store/Retrieve Backup Configuration

The full menu path for storing a configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
Press V to store the configuration.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move your cursor to STORE. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you
wish to store this configuration. Press Y for yes.
O940 0SA
16 :06 :37 07/ 16/ 2007
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE
A prompt will ask you to key in your password. After keying it in press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
== =Sto re/ Ret riev e C onf igur ati on= ==
1 6:0 8:40 07 /16 /200 7
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE
==>> En ter pas swo rd : XX XX
The word Saving will temporarily appear. When it disappears, press the Esc key to return to
the Main Menu.
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
=== > S avi ng.. ... ..
R ETR IEVE
121
1 6:0 9:37 07 /16 /200 7
5.32 Download Current Configuration

The full menu path for Download Backup Configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
B > Download Current Configuration

To download the backup configuration, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The File Transfer menu will appear. Press B.

O9400SA
===File Transfer===
A
B
C
D
E
F
->
->
->
->
->
->
16:31:21 07/17/2007
Download Firmware
Download Current Configuration
Download Backup Configuration
Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
Change Firmware Boot Bank
5.32.2 Download Current Configuration Procedure

The Download Current Configuration screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the
TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address
and file name. Enter these in the appropriate fields of the Download Current Configuration
screen. Press the Enter key.
122

O940 0SA
== = D ownl oad Cu rren t C onf igur ati on ===
18 :40 :35 09/ 24/ 2007
TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me
: 0 00. 000 .000 .00 0

:
< >
123
5.33 Download Firmware

The full menu path for Download Firmware is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
A > Download Firmware
To setup SDH/SONET granularity, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The File Transfer menu will appear. Press A.

O9400SA
===File Transfer===
A
B
C
D
E
F
->
->
->
->
->
->
16:31:21 07/17/2007
Download Firmware
5.33.2 Download Firmware Setup Procedure

The Download Firmware screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the TFTP
Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address and
file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the Download Firmware screen. Press the
Enter key.
124

O9400SA
=== Download Firmware ===
Firmware 1 Version
:
Firmware 2 Version
:
Current Firmware Bank:
Next Boot Firmware
:
TFTP Server IP
:
Firmware File Name
:
12:48:20 07/18/2007
V1.01.01 07/10/2007
V1.01.01 07/10/2007
2
2
10.3.12.1
o9400-S-V1.01.01.run____________________________________
<< Press ESC key to abort, ENTER key to Upload/Download >>
A prompt will ask if you really want to download. Press Y for yes.
The following screen will show as the download takes place.
O9400SA
Firmware 1 Version
:
Firmware 2 Version
:
Next Boot Firmware
:
TFTP Server IP
:
Firmware File Name
:
12:51:32 07/18/07
12:48:20 07/18/2007
V1.01.01 07/10/2007
V1.01.01 07/10/2007
2
2
10.3.12.1
o9400-S-V1.01.01.run
Downloading firmware ........
When the download is complete, the following messages will appear.

O9400SA
Firmware 1 Version
:
Firmware 2 Version
:
Next Boot Firmware
:
TFTP Server IP
:
Firmware File Name
:
12:52:43 07/18/07
12:53:44 07/18/07
12:53:45 07/18/07
12:52:28 07/18/2007
V1.01.01 07/10/2007
V1.01.01 07/10/2007
2
2
010.003.012.001
o9400-S-V1.01.01.run
Downloading firmware ........1076134 bytes received.

Check firmware checksum...
Checksum ok. Next boot firmware switch to bank 1.
You must now reset the system. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Main Menu.
Next is to reset the system.
The full menu path for resetting the system is as follows:
O > Logon
Z > System Reset
Press Z from the Main Menu.
125

O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The reset Main Board screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the asterisk to either
Warm Reset or Cold Reset. Press the Enter key.
Note:
1.
Warm Reset is used when there is traffic on your device and you wish to
update the software without disturbing that traffic.
2.
Warm Reset will result Packet Loss on Ethernet Switch Card, due to Ethernet
protocols restart.
O9400SA
>> Select ?
=== Reset Main Board ===
*Warm Reset
Cold Reset
The download firmware procedure is now complete.
126
12:55:01 07/18/2007
5.34 Download Backup Configuration

The full menu path for Download Backup Configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
C > Download Backup Configuration
To download the backup configuration, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The File Transfer menu will appear. Press C.

O9400SA
===File Transfer===
A
B
C
D
E
F
->
->
->
->
->
->
16:31:21 07/17/2007
Download Firmware
5.34.2 Download Backup Configuration Procedure

The Download Backup Configuration screen will appear.
O940 0SA
= == Down loa d B acku p C onf igur ati on ===
16 :50 :20 07/ 17/ 2007
TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me
: 0 00. 000 .000 .00 0

:
127

Use the backspace key to clear the TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your
PC to obtain the correct IP address and file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the
Download Backup Configuration screen. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
= == Down loa d B acku p C onf igur ati on ===
15 :01 :24 07/ 18/ 2007
TFTP Se rve r IP
: 0 10. 003 .012 .00 1
Conf ig Fil e Na me
:
abc_ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ __
A prompt will ask if you really want to download. Press Y for yes.
O9400SA
=== Download Backup Configuration ===
TFTP Server IP
Config File Name
15:01:24 07/18/2007
: 010.003.012.001
: abc
Really want to Download ?
The following screen will show as the download takes place.

O9400SA
=== Download Backup Configuration ===
TFTP Server IP
Config File Name
10:28:54
10:28:59
10:28:59
10:29:05
07/19/07
07/19/07
07/19/07
07/19/07
10:28:51 07/19/2007
: 010.003.012.001
: abc
Downloading backup config....217168 bytes received.

Download ok...
Check config checksum...
Checksum ok.
The download backup configuration procedure is now complete.
128
5.35 Upload Current Configuration from FLASH

The full menu path for Upload Current Configuration from FLASH is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
D > Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
To upload the current configuration, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The File Transfer menu will appear. Press F.

Note: You must already have a backup configuration in order to upload it. If you dont have
one press V from the Main Menu to store one.
O9400SA
===File Transfer===
A
B
C
D
E
F
->
->
->
->
->
->
16:31:21 07/17/2007
Download Firmware
129
5.35.2 Upload Current Configuration Procedure

The Upload Current Configuration screen will appear. Use the backspace key to clear the
TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your PC to obtain the correct IP address
and file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the Upload Current Configuration screen.
O940 0SA
=== Upl oad Cu rren t C onf igur ati on ===
12 :35 :59 09/ 26/ 2007
TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me
: 0 00. 000 .000 .00 0

:
A prompt will ask if you really want to upload. Press Y for yes.
Real ly wan t to Up loa d ?
The current configuration will be uploaded. This procedure is now complete.
130
5.36 Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH

The full menu path for Upload Backup Configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
E > Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
To upload the backup configuration, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The File Transfer menu will appear. Press E.

Note: You must already have a backup configuration in order to upload it. If you dont have
one press V from the Main Menu to store one.
O9400SA
===File Transfer===
A
B
C
D
E
F
->
->
->
->
->
->
16:31:21 07/17/2007
Download Firmware
5.36.2 Upload Backup Configuration Procedure

The Upload Backup Configuration screen will appear.
O940 0SA
= == Uplo ad Bac kup Con fig urat ion == =
16: 57: 12 0 7/1 7/2 007
TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me
: 0 00. 000 .000 .00 0

:
131

Use the backspace key to clear the TFTP Server IP field. Open the TFTP server file on your
PC to obtain the correct IP address and file name. Enter these in appropriate fields of the
Upload Backup Configuration screen. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
=== Upl oad Ba ckup Co nfi gura tio n = ==
14 :59 :28 07/ 18/ 2007
TFTP Se rve r IP
: 0 10. 003 .012 .00 1
Conf ig Fil e Na me
:
abc_ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ____ __
A prompt will ask if you really want to upload. Press Y for yes.
O940 0SA
14 :57 :59 07/ 18/ 2007
TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me
: 0 10. 003 .012 .00 1

: a bc
Real ly wan t to Up loa d ?
The following screen will show as the upload takes place.

O940 0SA
14 :57 :10 07/ 18/ 2007
TFTP Se rve r IP
Conf ig Fil e Na me
14: 57: 14 0 7/1 8/0 7

14: 57: 23 0 7/1 8/0 7
: 0 10. 003 .012 .00 1

: a bc
U plo adi ng b ack up conf ig. ... . 21 716 8 b ytes tr ans mitt ed.
U plo ad ok.
< >
The upload backup configuration procedure is now complete.
132
5.37 Change Firmware Boot Bank

The full menu path for Upload Backup Configuration is as follows:
O > Logon
L > File Transfer
F > Change Firmware Boot Bank
To change the Firmware Boot Bank, press L from the Main Menu.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
18:26:12 03/22/2007
Serial Number
: 000045
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 11:29:08 03/22/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
The File Transfer menu will appear. Press F.

O9400SA
===File Transfer===
A
B
C
D
E
F
->
->
->
->
->
->
16:31:21 07/17/2007
Download Firmware
5.37.2 Change Firmware Boot Bank Procedure

The Change Firmware Boot Bank Procedure screen will appear. The current Boot Bank will
be displayed on the screen. Use the Tab key to scroll in which firmware Bank you wish to use
after the next reboot of the O9400S. Available choices are 1 or 2. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
= == C han ge Firm war e B oot Ban k = ==
Cur ren t B oot Ban k : 1

Nex t B oot Ban k : 2
133
1 2:4 3:09 09 /26 /200 7

A prompt will ask if you really want to change the Firmware Bank. Press Y for yes. This
procedure is now complete and you will be returned to the previous menu.
Really want to change the boot bank ?
Note: This change will not go into effect until you power down the O9400S device and then
restart it.
134
5.38 E1 Setup
5.38.1 Choose a Unit
To setup E1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
A screen by screen setup example is shown below. Press U.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
14:31:07 09/03/2007
Serial Number
: 000031
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 13:24:48 09/03/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
A prompt will ask you to press the Tab key to select a unit. TG1 is the unit you want for E1/T1.
==>> Pr ess Tab ke y t o se lec t t he u nit : T G1
A unit menu will appear. Note that the label Unit TG1 E1 at the top of the sample screen
below identifies the unit as a E1 unit which is the default setting of Unit TG1.
Unit TG1 -E1
=== Unit Menu ===
13:05:15 11/21/2007
HW Version : D
[DISPLAY]
N -> E1/T1 Mode Display
D -> Line Config Display
S -> Unit Diagnostics Display
H -> E1/T1 SNCP Status
A -> Current Alarm Status
P -> Unit Performance
[SETUP]
T -> E1/T1 Mode Setup
C -> Line Config Setup
G -> Unit Diagnostics Setup
K -> SNCP User Command
M -> Unit Alarm Setup
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
E -> Return to Main Menu
[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm Queue
W -> Unit Load Default
To change to E1 or T1, press T from the unit menu. The E1/T1 Mode Setup screen will
appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in a E1/T1 mode setting. The choices are: T1-100 ohm for
T1 or E1-120 ohm for E1. Select E1-120 ohms. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if
you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be returned to the unit menu.
Press the Esc. key.
135

Unit TG 1 - E1
=== === E1 /T1 Mod e S etup == =
E1/T 1 M ode
15 :28 :08 09/ 03/ 2007
: E1- 120o hm
Note: If the card is E1-75 ohm, it can not be changed to T1-100 ohm or E1-120 ohm.
You will be returned to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear. Use
the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7
R ETR IEVE
The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes.

>> Store Current Configuration ? [Y/N]
A password prompt will appear. Key in your password. Press the Enter key.
==>> En ter pas swo rd :
The following message will appear briefly. This procedure is now complete.
===> Saving.......
5.38.2 E1/T1 Mode Setup
The menu path for E1/T1 Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
The setup procedure has already been fully explained in Section 5.35.1, above.
5.38.3 Line Config Setup
The menu path for E1 Line Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
136

Press C from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG1 -E1
=== Unit Menu ===
13:05:15 11/21/2007
HW Version : D
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
The Config Setup menu screen will appear.

Unit TG1 -E1
=== Line Config Setup ===
09:59:15 04/16/2009
A -> Line Coding Setup

B -> Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
C -> Customer Information Setup
5.38.3.1 E1 Line Coding Setup

The menu path for E1 Line Coding Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press A from the Config Setup screen. use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each field.
Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Available settings are: HDB3, AMI. Press the
Enter key.
Note: HDB3 (High Density Bipolar of order 3 code) is used in E1 and AMI (Alternate Mark
Inversion) is used in T1.
Unit TG1 -E1

137
09:59:15 04/16/2009

Unit TG 1 - E1
= == Lin e Co din g S etup == =
E1#
--01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1 8:3 4:33 09 /06 /200 7
C odi ng
- --- -H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
H DB3
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
5.38.3.2 E1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup

The menu path for E1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
138

Press B from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG1 -E1
09:59:15 04/16/2009

The Low-Order Path Overhead Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to The E1# field. Key a setting from the range 1~16. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG1 -E1
=== Low-Order Path Overhead Setup ===
E1# : 01
10:01:31 04/16/2009
The Low-Order Path Overhead Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to move the
Note: Some settings must be keyed in. Press the Enter key when done.
Table 5-32 Low-Order Path Overhead Settings
Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
J2_LEN
NULL,
16-byte (NULL padding),
16-byte (SPACE padding)
Key in your message
Key in your message
Key in your message
Range 0~7
Fixed
NULL
Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG
LP-EPSL
Rx-PSL
Note
This is a sample screen for 16-BYTE.

Unit TG1 -E1
E1# : 01
J2_LEN
Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG
17:16:23 12/02/2009

:
:
:
LP-EPSL : 2
Rx-PSL : 0
( Asynchronous )
( Unequipped )
139

O940 0SA
09/0 3/2 007
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:41 :57
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
5.38.3.3 E1 Customer Information Setup
The menu path for E1 Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press C from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG 1 - E1
== = L ine Con fig Set up ===
16: 28:4 5 0 9/0 3/20 07
A -> L ine Co ding Se tup

B -> L ow- Ord er P ath Ov erhe ad Set up
C -> C ust ome r In for mat ion Set up
< >
The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move
the cursor to each E1# field. Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.
140

Unit TG 1 - E1
= == C ust ome r In for mat ion Set up ===
0 9:2 9:49 09 /04 /200 7
E1#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Cus tome r I nfo rmat ion

E1- Line ___ ___ ____ ___
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
E1- Line
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
5.38.4 Unit Diagnostics Setup

The menu path for E1 Unit Diagnostics Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press G from the Unit Menu.
141

Unit TG 1 - E1
HW V ers ion : D
=== Uni t M enu ===
1 1:0 2:21 03 /11 /201 0
[DIS PLA Y]
N -> Li ne Impe dan ce Disp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig Dis play
S -> Un it Diag nos tic s Di spl ay
H -> E1 /T1 SNC P S tat us
A -> Cu rre nt A lar m S tatu s
P -> Pe rfo rman ce
[SET UP]
T -> Li ne Impe dan ce Setu p
C -> Li ne Conf ig Set up
G -> Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup
K -> SN CP User Co mma nd
M -> Un it Alar m S etu p
R -> Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
U -> Ch oos e a Uni t
E -> Re tur n to Ma in Menu
[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Qu eue
W -> Un it Load De fau lt
>>SP ACE ba r to re fre sh o r e nte r a com man d == =>
The Unit Diagnostics Setup screen will appear.

Unit TG 1 - E1
== = Un it Dia gnos tic s S etup == =
17:4 8:4 1 0 9/03 /20 07
A -> C han nel Loo pba ck Setu p

B -> U nit Di agno sti cs Setu p
5.38.4.1 Channel Loopback Setup

The menu path for E1 Channel Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
A > Channel Loopback Setup
Press A from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.
Unit TG 1 - E1
=== Uni t D iag nost ics Se tup ===
1 7:48 :41 09 /03/ 200 7

The Channel Loopback Test screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the
screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular
field. Then press the Enter key. Repeat this process for each setting you wish to make.
Note: The Loopback Timer is set up separately using the O9400S-1US1 main Main Menu.
Timer setup is a very simple procedure. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
142

Unit TG 1 - E1
=== Cha nne l Lo opb ack Tes t = ==
09 :38 :17 09/ 04/ 2007

Unit
E1#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
*O FF
TO- ALL -LI NE
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE

TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.38.4.2 Unit Diagnostics Setup
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
B > Unit Diagnostics Setup
Press B from the Unit Diagnostics Setup screen.
Unit TG 1 - E1
1 7:48 :41 09 /03/ 200 7

The Unit Diagnostics screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the E1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. The range is 1~16. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - E1
= == Uni t Di agn ost ics ===
10 :31 :53 09/ 04/ 2007
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~16, BA CKS PACE to ed it
Sen d T est Pat ter n t o == >
E1 # :
01
An expanded screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the screen.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular
field. Then press the Enter key.
143

Unit TG 1 - E1
= == Uni t Di agn ost ics ===
ARRO W K EYS : C URS OR MOVE , ENT ER K EY : I TEM SEL ECT
10 :31 :53 09/ 04/ 2007

E1 # :
01
Dire cti on
: *O pti cal- Lin e
TEST pa tte rn : *O FF
2^1 5-1
Trib uta ry- Line

2^ 20- 1
A further screen will display the Test Pattern information.

Unit TG 1 - E1
=== Un it D iag nos tics == =
1 0:3 6:41 09 /04 /200 7

E1 # :
01
Dire cti on
: *O pti cal- Lin e
TEST pa tte rn :
S YNC
ES
UAS
To tal
St ate
Co unt
Co unt
Co unt
O FF
=
=
=
=
* 2^1 5-1
UN SYNC
9
0
8
Trib uta ry- Line

2^ 20- 1
ES Rat io =
UAS Rat io =
1 00. 0%
0. 0%
This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key to return to the previous menu if yo wish to
set up a different loopback.
5.38.5 SNCP User Command
The menu path for E1 SNCP USER Command Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
K > SNCP USER Command
Press K from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1
== = U nit Men u = ==
1 0:4 1:02 09 /04 /200 7
HW V ers ion : D
[DIS PLA Y]
P -> Un it Perf orm anc e
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]
144

The SNCP User Command screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Port setting: range is 1~16.
Note: The command field settings can only be changed if the cross-connect is in PP-AD
mode. System mode type must be ADM (SNCP).
Table 5-33 SNCP Command Settings

Priority
1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)
SNCP Command Settings

Setting
Description
Clear
Lock-out
Lock out protection
FS-Ea
FS-Wa
Force switch to West side (Wa)
MS-Ea
MS-Wa
Manual switch to West side (Wa)

nit TG1 -E 1
== = S NCP Use r C omm and ===
10 :40 :23 09/ 04/ 2007
Port
:
Comm and :
01
F S-W a
Note :
FS = Fo rce Sw itch
MS = Ma nua l S witc h

A new prompt will appear.

SNCP Us er Comm and OK .
This procedure is complete. Press the ESC key twice to return to the Unit Menu.
5.38.6 E1 Unit Alarm Setup
The menu path for E1 Unit Alarm Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
145

Press M from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1
= == Unit Me nu ===
10 :41 :02 09/ 04/ 2007
HW V ers ion : D
[DIS PLA Y]
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]
The Unit Alarm Setup screen will appear.

Unit TG 1 - E1
= == Uni t Al arm Se tup ===
10 :47 :18 09/ 04/ 2007
A -> U nit Al arm Mas k/R elay Se tup

B -> U nit Al arm Sev eri ty S etu p
5.38.6.1 E1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

The menu path for E1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press A from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm setup screen will appear. To
select a port move the cursor to the E1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll n a port number.
Setting range is 1~16. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - E1
=== Un it A lar m S etup == =
1 0:5 6:28 09 /04 /200 7
E1# : 0 1
146

An expanded screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in an Alarm and Relay setting for
each alarm type. If you wish to copy the same configuration to different channels, key in the
channel settings. Press the Enter key.
E1# : 0 1
Ty pe
-- --- --TU -LO P
TU -AI S
LP -TI M
LP -UN EQ
LP -PL M
LP -RD I-S
LP -RD I-C
LP -RD I-P
LP -BI P
LP -RE I
E1 -LO S
E1 -AI S
E1 -UA S
Co py the sam e
A lar m
Re lay
- --- ---- -- --- --E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
c onf ig. fro m C han# 01 to chan #01
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
5.38.6.2 Unit Alarm Severity Setup
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press B from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm Severity Setup screen will appear.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each alarm field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a
setting. Settings are: INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT. Press the Enter key.
147

Unit TG1 -E1
=== Unit Alarm Severity Setup ===
Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-V5-BIP
LP-V5-REI
E1-LOS
E1-AIS
E1-UAS
10:04:39 04/16/2009
Severity
-------MAJR
MAJR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MAJR
MINR
MINR

O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
148
5.38.7 Performance Setup/Clear

The menu path for E1 /Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press R from the Unit Menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1
=== Uni t M enu ===
1 0:4 1:02 09 /04 /200 7
HW V ers ion : D
[DIS PLA Y]
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]
The SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear screen will appear.

Unit TG 1 - E1
== = S DH/S ONE T P erfo rma nce Set up/ Cle ar = ==1 1:1 2:51 09 /04 /200 7

5.38.7.1 Clear Performance Data

The menu path for E1 Clear Performance Data setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press A from the SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

149

The Clear Performance Data screen will appear. Press Y to clear performance data.
Unit TG 1 - E1
=== Cle ar Perf orm anc e Da ta ===
11 :18 :29 09/ 04/ 2007
>> C lea r p erfo rma nce dat a - ar e yo u s ure [Y/ N] ?
5.38.7.2 Unit Performance TCA Setup

The menu path for E1 Unit Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
B > Unit Performance TCA Setup
Press B from the SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

The Unit Performance TCA Setup screen will appear. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor
to each field.
Press the Enter key after you have finished making all of your settings for this screen.
Table 5-34 Unit Performance TCA Settings

Field
Alarm
Severity
Threshold
Setting Options
Default Setting
ENABLED, DISABLED
INFO, MINR, MAJR, CRIT
Range: 1~9999
Note
ENABLED
MINR
600, 600, 2048
Unit TG 1 - E1 = == Per form anc e T hres hol d C ross Al arm Set up 18: 48:0 1 0 9/0 6/20 07
Ty pe
-- --- --LP -BI P
LP -RE I
Li ne BPV
A lar m
- --- ---E NAB LED
E NAB LED
E NAB LED
Se ver ity
-- --- --MI NR
MI NR
MI NR
Thr esh old

--- --- --060 0
060 0
204 8
150

O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:41 :57 09 /03/ 200 7
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
5.38.8 E1 Performance Report
5.38.8.1 1-Hour Performance Report
The full menu path for E1 one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
LP-BIP(V5)

:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
0
---------------------
(BBE)
0
---------------------
(ES)
0
---------------------
09:41:22 11/20/2009
(BES)
0
---------------------

151
(SES)
0
---------------------
(UAS)
0
---------------------

The full menu path for E1 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
09:41:51 11/20/2009
EB LP-BIP(V5)
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96
, Last 96
(09:15) >
(07:15) >
(05:15) >
(03:15) >
(01:15) >
(23:15) >
(21:15) >
(19:15) >
(17:15) >
(15:15) >
(13:15) >
(11:15) >
15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------

5.38.8.3 7-Day Performance Report

The full menu path for E1 7 day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
LP-BIP(V5)
Current Day
11/19/2009
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
-----------------------------------------
(BBE)
-----------------------------------------
(ES)
-----------------------------------------
09:42:14 11/20/2009
(BES)
-----------------------------------------
(SES)
-----------------------------------------
(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

Note: The maximum value for line ES, BES, SES, UAS, and BPV is 65,535 respectively.
152
5.39 T1 Setup
To setup T1you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
.A screen by screen setup example is shown below. Press U.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
14:31:07 09/03/2007
Serial Number
: 000031
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 13:24:48 09/03/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
A unit menu will appear. Note that the label Unit TG1 E1 at the top of the sample screen shown
below identifies the unit as an E1 unit which is the default setting of the Unit TG1. Instructions for
changing to T1 are listed below.
Unit TG1 -E1
=== Unit Menu ===
13:11:03 11/21/2007
HW Version : D
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
To change to T1, press T from the unit menu. The E1/T1 Mode Setup screen will appear.
Use the Tab key to scroll in a Line Impedance setting. The choices are: T1-100 ohm or E1120 ohm. Select T1-100 ohm. Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you want to change
the configuration. Press Y for Yes. You will be returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key
153

Unit TG 1 - T1
== = E 1/T1 Mo de Setu p = ==
15 :28 :08 09/ 03/ 2007
E1/T 1 M ode : T 1-1 00o hm
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
The menu path for T1 Line Impedance Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
The setup procedure has already been fully explained in Section 5.35, above.
The menu path for T1 Line Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
154

Unit TG1 -T1
=== Unit Menu ===
13:11:03 11/21/2007
HW Version : D
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]

Unit TG1 -T1
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
15:50:36 09/11/2007
Line Coding Setup

Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
5.39.3.1 T1 Line Coding Setup

The menu path for T1 Line Coding Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press A from the Config Setup screen
Unit TG1 -T1
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
Line Coding Setup

155
15:50:36 09/11/2007

The Line Coding Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each
field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings.
Line Code setting choices are: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution) or AMI (Alternate
Mark Inversion)
Cable Length setting choices are: 0~133, 133~266, 266~399, 399~533, 533~655
Unit TG 1 - T1
== = L ine Cod ing Se tup ===
T1#
--01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C odi ng
- --- -B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
B 8ZS
12 :15 :40 09/ 11/ 2007
cab le leng th
--- --- ---- -5 33~ 655 ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
0 ~13 3ft
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
156

5.39.3.2 T1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup
The menu path for T1 Low-Order Path Overhead Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG1 -T1
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
15:50:36 09/11/2007
Line Coding Setup

The Low-Order Path Overhead Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to the T1# field. Key a setting from the range 1~16. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
= == Low- Ord er Path Ov erh ead Set up ===
12 :26 :02 09/ 11/ 2007
T1# : 0 1
The Low-Order Path Overhead Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to move the
Table 5-35 Low-Order Path Overhead Settings
Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
J2_LENf
NULL, 16-BYTE (NULL padding), 16BYTE (SPACE padding)

Key in your message
Key in your message
Key in your message
Range 0~7
Fixed
NULL
Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG
LP-EPSL
Rx-PSL
Note: Setting fields vary depending on the setting you choose for J2_LEN.
This sample screen is for a NULL setting.
Unit TG1 -T1
T1# : 01
J2_LEN : NULL
LP-EPSL : 2
Rx-PSL : 0
( Asynchronous )
( Unequipped )
157
12:26:02 09/11/2007
Note

This is a sample screen for 16-BYTE.
Unit TG1 -T1
T1# : 01
J2_LEN
Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG
17:28:23 12/02/2009

:
:
:
LP-EPSL : 2
Rx-PSL : 3
( Asynchronous )
( Bit Synchronous )
Press the Enter key after selecting your settings.

O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15: 41: 57 0 9/0 3/2 007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
5.39.3.3 TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
The menu path for TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup
158

Unit TG1 -T1
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
15:50:36 09/11/2007
Line Coding Setup

The TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in
your setting for the XC Granularity field. Setting choices are TU11, TU12. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
=== TU 11/ TU12 Ma ppi ng M ode Se tup ===
09/1 1/2 007
XC G ran ula rity
1 5:57 :42
: T U11
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
159
5.39.3.4 T1 Customer Information Setup

The menu path for T1 Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press D from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG1 -T1
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
15:50:36 09/11/2007
Line Coding Setup

the cursor to each T1# field. Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
== = Cu sto mer Inf orm ati on S etu p = ==
12 :56 :55 09/ 11/ 2007
T1#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

T1- Line ___ ___ ____ ___
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
T1- Line
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE
160
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

===> Saving.......
The menu path for T1 Unit Diagnostics Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 1 - T1
=== Un it M enu == =
1 3:0 0:1 4 09 /11 /20 07
HW V ers ion : D
[DIS PLA Y]
[SET UP]
T -> E1 /T1 Mod e S etu p
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]

Unit TG 1 - T1


The menu path for T1 Channel Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
161
1 2:59 :37 09 /11/ 200 7

Unit TG 1 - T1
12:5 9:3 7 0 9/11 /20 07

screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular field.
Then press the Enter key. Repeat this process for each setting you wish to make.
Note: The Loopback Timer is set up separately using the O9400S main Main Menu. Timer
setup is a very simple procedure. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
Unit TG 1 - T1
=== Ch ann el L oop bac k Te st ===
1 3:0 1:20 09 /11 /200 7

Unit
T1#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
*O FF
TO- ALL -LI NE
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE

TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
TO -LIN E
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 1 - T1

162
12:5 9:3 7 0 9/11 /20 07

The Unit Diagnostics screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the T1#
field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. The range is 1~16. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
1 3:0 9:42 09 /11 /200 7
T1 # :
01
An expanded screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the screen. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular field. Then press the
Enter key.
Unit TG 1 - T1
1 3:0 9:42 09 /11 /200 7

T1 # :
01
Dire cti on
: *O pti cal- Lin e
Trib uta ry- Line
2^1 5-1
2^ 20- 1

Unit TG 1 - T1
1 3:0 9:42 09 /11 /200 7

T1 # :
01
Dire cti on
O pti cal- Lin e * Trib uta ry- Line
TEST pa tte rn :
S YNC
ES
UAS
To tal
St ate
Co unt
Co unt
Co unt
O FF
=
=
=
=
* 2^1 5-1
UN SYNC
0
6
6
2^ 20- 1
ES Rat io =
UAS Rat io =
0. 0%
1 00. 0%
This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key to return to the previous menu if you wish to
5.39.5 SNCP USER Command
The menu path for T1 SNCP USER Command Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
163

Unit TG 1 - T1
= == Unit Me nu ===
13 :13 :27 09/ 11/ 2007
HW V ers ion : D
[DIS PLA Y]
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]
mode.
System mode type must be ADM (SNCP).
Priority

Setting
Description
1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)
Clear
Lock-out
FS-Ea
FS-Wa
MS-Ea
MS-Wa

Lock out protection

Unit TG1 -T1
=== SNCP User Command ===
13:14:32 09/11/2007
Port
:
Command :
01
NONE
Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch
164


5.39.6 T1 Unit Alarm Setup
The menu path for T1 Unit Alarm Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 1 - T1
= == Unit Me nu ===
13 :13 :27 09/ 11/ 2007
HW V ers ion : D
[DIS PLA Y]
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]

Unit TG 1 - T1
13 :26 :26 09/ 11/ 2007

5.39.6.1 T1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

The menu path for T1 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
select a port move the cursor to the T1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a port number.
165

Unit TG 1 - T1
13 :28 :22 09/ 11/ 2007
T1# : 0 1
Unit TG1 -T1
=== Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ===
T1# : 01
Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-V5-BI
LP-V5-REI
T1-LOS
T1-AIS
T1-UAS
Alarm
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
Relay
-------DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
10:07:56 04/16/2009
Copy the same config. From Chan#01 to Chan#01
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
166

O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG1 -T1
Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-V5-BI
LP-V5-REI
T1-LOS
T1-AIS
T1-UAS
Severity
-------ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
10:11:25 04/16/2009
Copy the same config. From Chan#01 to Chan#01

O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
167

The menu path for T1 /Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 1 - T1
=== Uni t M enu ===
1 3:1 3:27 09 /11 /200 7
HW V ers ion : D
[DIS PLA Y]
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]

Unit TG 1 - E1


O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press A from the SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1

168

Unit TG 1 - T1
=== Cle ar Perf orm anc e Da ta ===
13 :33 :55 09/ 11/ 2007

The menu path for T1 Unit Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
B > Unit Performance TCA Setup
Press B from the SDH/SONET Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 1 - E1
=== SD H/SO NET Pe rfor man ce Setu p/C lea r == =11 :12 :51 09/ 04/ 2007

to each field.

Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
Alarm
Severity
Threshold
ENABLED, DISABLED
Range: 1~9999
ENABLED
MINR
600, 600, 1544
Note
Unit TG 1 - T1 = == Per form anc e T hres hol d C ross Al arm Set up 13: 36:3 4 0 9/1 1/20 07
Ty pe
-- --- --LP -BI P
LP -RE I
Li ne BPV
A lar m
- --- ---E NAB LED
E NAB LED
E NAB LED
Se ver ity
-- --- --MI NR
MI NR
MI NR
Thr esh old

--- --- --060 0
060 0
154 4
169

O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
5.39.8 T1 Performance Report

The full menu path for T1 one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
LP-BIP(V5)

:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
0
---------------------
(BBE)
0
---------------------
(ES)
0
---------------------
10:05:09 11/20/2009
(BES)
0
---------------------


The full menu path for T1 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
170
(SES)
0
---------------------
(UAS)
0
---------------------
O9400SA
10:05:49 11/20/2009
EB LP-BIP(V5)
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96
, Last 96
(09:45) >
(07:45) >
(05:45) >
(03:45) >
(01:45) >
(23:45) >
(21:45) >
(19:45) >
(17:45) >
(15:45) >
(13:45) >
(11:45) >
15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------

5.39.8.3 7-Day Performance

The full menu path for T1 7 Day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
LP-BIP(V5)
Current Day
11/19/2009
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
-----------------------------------------
(BBE)
-----------------------------------------
(ES)
-----------------------------------------
10:06:11 11/20/2009
(BES)
-----------------------------------------
(SES)
-----------------------------------------
(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

171
5.40 E3 Setup
Note: E3 signal can only be mapped into AU4/TU3 format.
To setup E3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
14:31:07 09/03/2007
Serial Number
: 000031
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 13:24:48 09/03/2007
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
A unit menu will appear. Note that the label Unit TG2 E3 at the top of the sample screen
below identifies the unit as an E3 unit which is the default setting of Unit TG2.
U Unit TG2 -E3
=== Unit Menu ===
13:53:53 10/19/2009
HW Version
: A
CPLD Version : Ver 1
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
X -> Clear Unit Alarm History
172

To change to E3 or T3, press T from the unit menu. The E3/T3 Mode Setup screen will
appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in a E3/T3 mode setting. The choices are: E3 (HDB3)
or T3 (B3ZS). Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration.
Press Y for Yes. You will be returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc. key.
nit TG2 -E 3
= == E3/T 3 M ode Set up ===
E3/T 3 M ode
13 :55: 30 10/ 19/2 009
: E3( HDB3 )
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......

O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
The setup procedure has already been fully explained in Section 5.35.1, above.
The menu path for E3 Line Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
173

Unit TG2 -E3
=== Unit Menu ===
11:13:30 10/20/2009
HW Version
: A
[DISPLAY]
D -> Line Config. Display
[SETUP]
C -> Line Config. Setup
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]

Unit TG2 -E3
=== Line Config. Setup ===
14:07:12 01/04/2010
A -> SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup

B -> Customer Information Setup
5.40.3.1 SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup

The menu path for SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
A > SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
Press A from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG 2 - E3
01/0 4/2 010
= == Line Co nfi g. S etu p = ==
1 4:07 :12
A -> S DH/ SON ET P ath Ov erhe ad Set up

B -> C ust ome r In for mat ion Set up
The SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup screen wll appear. Key in a setting from the range
1~3. Press the Enter key.
174

Unit TG 2 - E3
=== SDH /SO NET Pat h O verh ead Se tup ===
1 4:02 :51
12/1 6/2 009
ARRO W K EYS : CU RSO R M OVE, Pl eas e In put : 1 ~3, BAC KSP ACE to edi t
E3# : 1 _
An expanded setup screen will appear. Key in your settings and press the Enter key.
Table 5-38 SDH/SONET Path Overhead Settings

Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
J2_LEN
NULL, 1-BYTE
16-BYTE (SPACE padding)
64-BYTE (NULL padding)
Key in your message
Key in your message
Key in your message
Range 0~0xFF
Range 0~0xFF
Fixed
NULL
Expected_J2_MSG
TX_J2_MSG
RX_J2_MSG
TX_PSL
EPSL
RX-PSL
Note
0x4
0x4
Unit TG2 -E3

=== SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup === 17:57:38 12/02/2009
E3# : 01
J1_LEN
Expected_J1_MSG
TX_J1_MSG
RX_J1_MSG
: NULL
:
:
:
Tx_PSL : 0x4 ( Asynchronous mapping into Container-3 )

EPSL : 0x4 ( Asynchronous mapping into Container-3 )
Rx-PSL : 0x0 ( Unequipped )
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE

175
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007

===> Saving.......
5.40.3.2 E3 Customer Information Setup

The menu path for E3 Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press C from the Config Setup screen. The Config Setup screen will appear. Press B.
Unit TG2 -E3
=== Line Config. Setup ===
14:07:12 01/04/2010
A -> SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup

B -> Customer Information Setup
the cursor to each E3# field. Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Cu sto mer Inf orm atio n S etu p == =
E3#
01
02
03
11 :47: 34 10/ 20/2 009

E3- Line ___ ___ ____ ___
E3- Line
E3- Line
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

176

===> Saving.......

O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG2 -E3
=== Unit Menu ===
11:13:30 10/20/2009
HW Version
: A
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]

Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Uni t D iagn ost ics Set up ===
12 :06 :56 10/ 20/ 200 9


The menu path for E3 Channel Loopback Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Un it Diag nos tic s Se tup == =
1 2:0 6:5 6 10 /20 /20 09

177

screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular
field. Then press the Enter key. Repeat this process for each setting you wish to make.
Note: The Loopback Timer is set up separately if you are using the O9400S-1US1 main Main
Menu. Timer setup is a very simple procedure. The menu path is as follows:
Unit TG 2 - E3
= == Cha nnel Lo opb ack Tes t = ==
12 :08: 01 10/ 20/2 009

Unit
E3#
01
02
03
*O FF
TO- ALL -E3 T3-L INE
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE

TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO -E3T 3-L INE

TO -E3T 3-L INE
TO -E3T 3-L INE
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Uni t D iagn ost ics Set up ===
12 :06 :56 10/ 20/ 200 9

The Unit Diagnostics screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the E1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. The range is 1~3. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - E3
= == Uni t Di agn ost ics Set up ===
12 :13: 33 10/ 20/2 009
E3 # :
1_
An expanded screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the screen.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular
field. Then press the Enter key.
178

Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Un it D iag nos tics Se tup ===
10/2 0/2 009
1 2:13 :33

E3 # :
Dire cti on
: *O pti cal- Lin e
2^1 5-1
E3T3 -Li ne
2^ 23- 1

Unit TG 2 - E3
= == Uni t Di agn ost ics Set up ===
12 :13: 33 10/ 20/2 009

E3 # :
Dire cti on
: *O pti cal- Lin e
2^1 5-1
E3T3 -Li ne
2^ 23- 1
This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key to return to the previous menu if yo wish to
The menu path for E1 SNCP USER Command Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Uni t M enu ===
1 2:16 :40 10 /20/ 200 9
HW V ers ion
: A
CPLD Ve rsi on : Ve r 1
[DIS PLA Y]
N -> E3 /T3 Mod e D isp lay
D -> Li ne Conf ig. Di spla y
[SET UP]
C -> Li ne Conf ig. Se tup
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]
X -> Cl ear Uni t A lar m Hi sto ry
179

each field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
mode. System mode type must be ADM(SNCP).

Priority
1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)

Setting
Description
Clear
Lock-out
Lock out protection
FS-Ea
FS-Wa
MS-Ea
MS-Wa
Unit TG 2 - E3
== = S NCP Use r C omma nd ===
12 :17: 35 10/ 20/2 009
Port
:
Comm and :
1_
FS-Wa
Note :
FS = Fo rce Sw itch
MS = Ma nua l S witc h


SNCP User Command OK.
5.40.6 E3 Unit Alarm Setup
The menu path for E3 Unit Alarm Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
180

Unit TG 2 - E3
= == U nit Me nu = ==
12 :16: 40 10/ 20/2 009
HW V ers ion
: A
[DIS PLA Y]
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]

Unit TG 2 - E3
= == Unit Al arm Set up ===
12 :29: 56 10/ 20/2 009

5.40.6.1 E3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press A from the Unit Alarm Setup menu. The Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup screen will
appear. To select a port move the cursor to the E3# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a port
number. Setting range is 1~3. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Uni t A larm Ma sk/ Rela y S etu p == =
12 :31: 04 10/ 20/2 009
E3# : 1 _
181

Unit TG 2 - E3
=== Uni t A larm Ma sk/ Rela y S etu p == =
E3# : 1
Ty pe
-- --- --TU -LO P
TU -AI S
LP -TI M
LP -UN EQ
LP -PL M
LP -RD I-S
LP -RD I-C
LP -RD I-P
LP -B3 -BI P
LP -RE I
E3 -LO S
E3 -AI S
E3 -BP V
Co py the sam e
A lar m
Re lay
- --- ---- -- --- --E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
D ISA BLED DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
E NAB LED
DI SAB LED
c onf ig. fro m C han# 1
12 :31: 04 10/ 20/2 009
to chan #3
returned to the unit menu. Press the Esc key
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......

O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
182

Unit TG2 -E3
Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-B3-BIP
LP-REI
E3-LOS
E3-AIS
E3-BPV
12:37:36 10/20/2009
Severity
-------MAJR
MAJR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MAJR
MINR
MINR

O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?

*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===>
Saving.......

The menu path for E3 Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
183

Unit TG 2 - E3
== Uni t M enu ===
1 2:5 0:41 10 /20 /200 9
HW V ers ion
: A
[DIS PLA Y]
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]
The Performance Setup/Clear screen will appear.

Unit TG 2 - E3
10/2 0/2 009
= == Per form anc e S etup /Cl ear ===
1 2:54 :04
A - > C lea r Pe rfo rma nce Dat a

B - > P erf orma nce Th resh old Se tup

O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press A from the Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 2 - E3
10/2 0/2 009
1 2:54 :04

Unit TG 2 - E3
10/2 0/2 009
=== Cl ear Per for manc e D ata ===
>> C lea r p erfo rma nce dat a - ar e yo u s ure [Y/ N]
184
1 2:55 :43

5.40.7.2 Performance Threshold Setup
The menu path for E3 Performance Threshold Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press B from the Performance Setup/Clear menu.
Unit TG 2 - E3
10/2 0/2 009
1 2:54 :04

The Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the Arrow keys to
move the cursor to each field.
Table 5-40 Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Settings
Field
Alarm
Severity
Threshold
Setting Options
Default Setting
ENABLED, DISABLED
Range: 1~9999
Note
ENABLED
MINR
600, 600, 2048
Unit TG 2 - E3
== = Pe rf. Th resh old Cr oss Ala rm Setu p = ==1 2:59 :52
10/2 0/2 009
Ty pe
-- --- --HP -BI P
HP -RE I
Li ne BPV
A lar m
- --- ---D ISA BLED
D ISA BLED
D ISA BLED
Se ver ity
-- --- --CR IT
CR IT
CR IT
Thr esh old

--- --- --000 0
000 0
000 0
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
R ETR IEVE

185
1 5:41 :57 09 /03/ 200 7

===> Saving.......
5.40.8 E3 Performance Report
5.40.8.1 1-Hour Performance
The full menu path for E3 one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
TG2-Ch#1 HP-BIP(B3)

:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
0
---------------------
(BBE)
0
---------------------
(ES)
0
---------------------
09:44:15 11/20/2009
(BES)
0
---------------------
(SES)
0
---------------------
(UAS)
0
---------------------


The full menu path for E3 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
09:44:41 11/20/2009
TG2-Ch#1 EB HP-BIP(B3)
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96
, Last 96
(09:15) >
(07:15) >
(05:15) >
(03:15) >
(01:15) >
(23:15) >
(21:15) >
(19:15) >
(17:15) >
(15:15) >
(13:15) >
(11:15) >
15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------

186
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
5.40.8.3 7-Day Performance Report

The full menu path for E3 7 day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
TG2-Ch#1 HP-BIP(B3)
Current Day
11/19/2009
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
-----------------------------------------
(BBE)
-----------------------------------------
(ES)
-----------------------------------------
09:45:07 11/20/2009
(BES)
-----------------------------------------
(SES)
-----------------------------------------
(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

187
5.41 T3 Setup
Note: T3 signal can only be mapped into AU4/TU3, AU3/C3, or STS-1 format
To setup T3 you must first choose a unit. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
09:14:39 10/21/2009
Serial Number
: 146
Hardware Version: D
Device Name : O9400SA

Start Time : 10:43:43 10/20/2009
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
P -> SDH/SONET Performance
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
A unit menu will appear. Note that the label Unit TG2 E3 at the top of the sample screen shown
below identifies the unit as an E3 unit which is the default setting of the Unit TG2. Instructions for
changing to T3 are listed below.
Unit TG2 -E3
=== Unit Menu ===
09:16:55 10/21/2009
HW Version
: A
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
188

O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
To change to T3, press T from the unit menu.
Unit TG2 -E3
=== Unit Menu ===
09:16:55 10/21/2009
HW Version
: A
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
The E3/T3 Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the setting for E3/T3
Mode. The choices are: E3(HDB3) or T3(B3ZS). Press the Enter key. A prompt will ask if
you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. Press the Enter key to return to the
main menu.
The menu path for T3 Line Config Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG2 -T3
=== Unit Menu ===
09:16:55 10/21/2009
HW Version
: A
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
189

Unit TG2 -T3
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
09:51:40 10/21/2009
Line Transmit Length Setup

Mapping Mode Setup
SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
5.41.3.1 Line Transmit Length Setup

The menu path for T3 Line Transmit Length Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
A > Line Transmit Length Setup
Press A from the Config Setup screen
Unit TG2 -T3
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
09:51:40 10/21/2009

Mapping Mode Setup
The Line Transmit Length Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
each field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Cable Length setting choices are: 0~133 and 133~266.
Unit TG2 -T3
=== Line Transmit Length Setup ===
T3#
===
01
02
03
10:12:38 10/21/2009
Length
==============
0~133ft
0~133ft
0~133ft
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes.
A Success message will appear on the left. Press the Enter key to return the the unit menu.
Success.
>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)Y
190

O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
5.41.3.2 Mapping Mode Setup

The menu path for T3 Mapping Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
B > Mapping Mode Setup
Unit TG2 -T3
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
09:51:40 10/21/2009

Mapping Mode Setup
The Mapping Mode Setup screen will appear. Mapping Mode setting choices
are: AU3/C3 or AU4/TU3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Mapping Mode
field. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
= == Mapp ing Mo de S etu p = ==
10/2 1/2 009
Mapp ing Mo de
1 0:23 :13
A U3/C 3
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes.
To return tho the Unit Menu, press Esc. twice. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the
Main Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen will appear.
Use the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
191

O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15: 41: 57 0 9/0 3/2 007
R ETR IEVE

===>
Saving.......
5.41.3.3 SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup

The menu path for TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
C > SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup
Unit TG2 -T3
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
09:51:40 10/21/2009

Mapping Mode Setup
The TU11/TU12 Mapping Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in
your T3# setting. Setting choices are 1,2,or 3. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
=== SDH /SO NET Pat h O verh ead Se tup === 10 :40: 28 10/ 21/2 009
T3# : 1 _
192
Table 5-41 SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setting Options

Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
T3#
J1_LEN
1
NULL
Expected_J1_MSG
TX_J1_MSG
RX_J1_MSG
Tx_PSL
1,2, or 3
NULL, 1-BYTE
Key in your message
Key in your message
Key in your message
Range: 0~0xFF
EPSL
Range: 0~0xFF
Rx_PSL
Fixed
0x4
into
0x4
into
Notes
(Asynch. mapping
container-3)
(Asynch. mapping
Container-3 )
An expanded screen wll appear. Key or scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
=== SDH /SO NET Pat h O verh ead Se tup === 18 :07: 26 12/ 02/2 009
T3# : 0 1
J 1_LE N
Expe cte d_J 1_MS G
T X_J 1_MS G
R X_J 1_MS G
: NU LL
:
:
:
T x_PS L : 0x 4 ( Asy nch rono us map ping in to Cont ain er- 3 )

EPS L : 0x 4 ( Asy nch rono us map ping in to Cont ain er- 3 )
R x-PS L : 0x 0 ( Une qui pped )
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. Press the Esc.
key to return to the Config Setup menu.
Press Esc. to return to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu. From the Main
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

193

===> Sa vin g... ... .
5.41.3.4 Customer Information Setup

The menu path for T3 Customer Information Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press D from the Config Setup screen.
Unit TG2 -T3
A
B
C
D
->
->
->
->
09:51:40 10/21/2009

Mapping Mode Setup
the cursor to each T3# field. Key in your customer information. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
== = C ust omer In for mati on Set up = ==
10/2 1/2 009
T3#
01
02
03
1 1:29 :47

T3- Line ___ ___ ____ ___
T3- Line
T3- Line
A prompt will ask if you want to change the configuration. Press Y for Yes. Press the Esc.
key to return to the Config Setup menu.
Press the Esc. key again to return to the Unit Menu. Press E to return to the Main Menu.
From the Main Menu press V to save the change. The Store/Retrieve Configuration screen
will appear. Use the arrow key to move the asterisk to STORE. Press the Enter key.
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
194

The menu path for T3 Unit Diagnostics Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG2 -T3
=== Unit Menu ===
09:16:55 10/28/2009
HW Version
: A
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]

Unit TG 2 - T3
22:2 0:2 6
10/ 28/ 200 9


O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 2 - T3
11 :32 :05 10/ 21/ 200 9

screen. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular field.
Then press the Enter key. Repeat this process for each setting you wish to make.
195

U Unit TG 2 -T3
=== Cha nne l Lo opb ack Tes t = ==
11 :33 :19
10 /21 /200 9

Unit
T3#
01
02
03
*O FF
TO- ALL -E3 T3-L INE
*O FF
*O FF
*O FF
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE

TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO- OPT ICA L-LI NE
TO -E3T 3-L INE

TO -E3T 3-L INE
TO -E3T 3-L INE
<>< >
Note: The Loopback Timer is set up separately using the O9400S main Main Menu. Timer
setup is a very simple procedure. The menu path is as follows:
O > Logon
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 2 - T3
11:3 2:0 5 1 0/21 /20 09

The Unit Diagnostics screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the T1#
field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a setting. The range is 1~3. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG 2 - T3
11 :37 :22
1 0/2 1/20 09
T3 # :
1_
An expanded screen will appear. All setting choices are displayed on the screen. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the selection you want for a particular field. Then press the
Enter key.
196

Unit TG 2 - T3
11 :37 :22
10/ 21/2 009

T3 # :
Dire cti on
: *O pti cal- Lin e
2^1 5-1
E3T3 -Li ne
2^ 23- 1

Unit TG 2 - T3
=== Un it D iag nos tics Se tup ===
10/2 1/2 009
1 1:37 :22

T3 # :
Dire cti on
: *O pti cal- Lin e
S YNC
ES
UAS
To tal
St ate
Co unt
Co unt
Co unt
=
=
=
=
2^1 5-1
UN SYNC
0
6
6
E3T3 -Li ne
2^ 23- 1
ES Rat io =
UAS Rat io =
0. 0%
1 00. 0%
This procedure is complete. Press the Esc key to return to the previous menu if you wish to
The menu path for T1 SNCP USER Command Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG2 -T3
=== Unit Menu ===
22:58:48 10/28/2009
HW Version
: A
[DISPLAY]
[SETUP]
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
197

Unit TG2 -T3

00:35:16 10/29/2009
Port
:
Command :
1_
NONE
Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch
mode. System mode type must be ADM (SNCP).

Priority

Setting
Description
1 (high)
2
3
3
4 (low)
4 (low)
Clear
Lock-out
FS-Ea
FS-Wa
MS-Ea
MS-Wa

Lock out protection

Unit TG2 -T3
00:51:19 10/29/2009
Port
:
Command :
1_
NONE
Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch
198


5.41.6 T3 Unit Alarm Setup
The menu path for T3 Unit Alarm Setup is as follows:
O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 2 - T3
== = Un it Men u == =
0 0:5 4:38
1 0/2 9/20 09
HW V ers ion
: A
[DIS PLA Y]
H -> E3/T3 SNCP St atu s
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]

Unit TG 2 - T3
=== Un it A lar m S etup == =
0 1:0 1:33

5.41.6.1 T3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup

O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
199
10/ 29/2 009

select a port move the cursor to the T1# field. Use the Tab key to scroll in a port number.
Unit TG 2 - T3
=== Un it Alar m M ask /Rel ay Set up = ==
0 1:20 :52
10/2 9/2 009
T3# : 1 _
Unit TG2 -T3
=== Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup ===
T3# : 1
Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-B3-BIP
LP-REI
T3-LOS
T3-AIS
T3-BPV
Copy the same
Alarm
Relay
-------- -------ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
DISABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
config. from Chan#1
01:24:51 10/29/2009
to chan#3
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7
R ETR IEVE

200

===> Saving.......

O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG2 -T3
Type
-------TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-RDI-P
LP-B3-BIP
LP-REI
T3-LOS
T3-AIS
T3-BPV
01:33:23 10/29/2009
Severity
-------MAJR
MAJR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MAJR
MINR
MINR

O940 0S
>> S ele ct ?
*ST ORE
15 :41 :57 09/ 03/ 2007
R ETR IEVE

===> Saving.......
201

The menu path for T1 /Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Unit TG 2 - T3
10/2 9/2 009
=== Uni t M enu ===
0 1:45 :25
HW V ers ion
: A
[DIS PLA Y]
H -> E3/T3 SNCP St atu s
[SET UP]
[LOG ]
F -> Lo g O ff
O -> Lo g O n
[MIS C]

Unit TG 2 - T3
=== Per for manc e S etu p/Cl ear == =
0 1:4 8:08
10/ 29/2 009


The menu path for T3 Clear Performance Data setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press A to clearn performance data.
Unit TG 2 - T3
=== Pe rfo rman ce Set up/C lea r = ==
01: 51:4 9

202
10/ 29/2 009


The menu path for T1 Unit Performance TCA Setup is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
B >Performance Threshold Setup
Press B for Performance Threshold Setup.
Unit TG 2 - T3
10/2 9/2 009
1 7:01 :35

to each field.
203

Field
Setting Options
Default Setting
Alarm
Severity
Threshold
ENABLED, DISABLED
Range: 1~9999
DISABLE
CRIT
0000
Unit TG 2 - T3
=== Pe rf. Thr esh old Cro ss Alar m S etu p == =
10/2 9/2 009
Ty pe
-- --- --HP -BI P
HP -RE I
Li ne BPV
A lar m
- --- ---E NAB LED
E NAB LED
E NAB LED
Se ver ity
-- --- --MI NR
MI NR
MI NR
Note
17:0 9:5 3
Thr esh old

--- --- --223 0
550 0
126 0
O940 0SA
>> S ele ct?
* STO RE
1 5:4 1:57 09 /03 /200 7
RE TRI EVE

>> Store Current Configuration? [Y/N]
===> Saving.......
5.41.8 T3 Performance Report
The full menu path for T3 one hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
204

O9400SA
TG2-Ch#1 HP-BIP(B3)

:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
0
---------------------
(BBE)
0
---------------------
(ES)
0
---------------------
10:07:31 11/20/2009
(BES)
0
---------------------
(SES)
0
---------------------
(UAS)
0
---------------------


The full menu path for T3 24 hour performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
10:09:11 11/20/2009
TG2-Ch#1 EB HP-BIP(B3)
(EB)
(BBE)
(ES)
(BES)
(SES)
(UAS)
: 0
0
0
0
0
0
Current Day
: ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- EB
01-08
09-16
17-24
25-32
33-40
41-48
49-56
57-64
65-72
73-80
81-88
89-96
, Last 96
(09:45) >
(07:45) >
(05:45) >
(03:45) >
(01:45) >
(23:45) >
(21:45) >
(19:45) >
(17:45) >
(15:45) >
(13:45) >
(11:45) >
15-Min Interval :
------ ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ----------- ------ ------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------

205
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------

5.41.8.3 7-Day Performance
The full menu path for T3 7 Day performance report is as follows:
O > Logon
U > Choose a Unit
Press Enter
O9400SA
TG2-Ch#1 HP-BIP(B3)
Current Day
11/19/2009
11/18/2009
11/17/2009
11/16/2009
11/15/2009
11/14/2009
11/13/2009
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(EB)
-----------------------------------------
(BBE)
-----------------------------------------
(ES)
-----------------------------------------
10:09:41 11/20/2009
(BES)
-----------------------------------------
(SES)
-----------------------------------------
(UAS)
-----------------------------------------

206
5.42 Ethernet Switch Setup

For background information on Ethernet please refer to CHAPTER 7, ETHERNET
APPENDIX.
5.42.1 Unit Menu Tree
Ethernet Interface Card with Switch
VT- 100 Menu Tree
[ DISPLAY ]
C > WAN (VCG) & Link Display
A > Add/Drop Channel Count
B > Customer Information Display
C > LAN Link Status
D > LCAS Channel Status

A > Path Alarm Status
B > Linkdown Alarm Status

H > Enet SNCP Status

G > WAN (VCG) Statistics
I > Switch Status
A > Switch Statistics
B > VLAN ID Info
C > VLAN Port Association Table
D > RSTP Bridge Info
E > RSTP Port Info
[ SETUP ]
M>
S>
Mode Setup
VCG & Link Setup
A > Payload/LCAS Setup
B > Encapsulation Type Setup
C > Encapsulation Parameter Setup
D > Path Alarm Setup
E > VCG Alarm Threshold Setup
F > Linkdown Alarm Setup
G > Link Config Setup
H > Customer Information Setup
I > Link Fail Propagation Setup
J > Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup

L > Loopback Test

T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
A > VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup
B > VLAN Port Configuration Setup
C > VLAN Port Association Setup
B > PortMap Setup

A > WAN Portmap Setup
B > LAN Portmap Setup
C > Port Trunk Setup

D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
A > MSTP Region/CIST Setup
B > Spantree Port Enable
C > MSTP Instance/VLAN Setup
D > MSTP Instance/Priority Setup
E > MSTP/RSTP Port Setup Setup
F > RSTP Bridge Setup
E > IGMP Setup

A > IGMP Snooping
B > IGMP Fast Leave
C > IGMP Router Port
D > IGMP IP Multicast Range
E > IGMP Cross Vlan
F > IGMP Cross Vlan
F > Flow Control Setup
[LOG]
F > Log Off
O > Log On
U > Choose a Unit
G > QoS Setup

A > Class of Service Setup
B > TCP/UDP Port Access Control
C > Transmission Scheduling
D > Transmission WRED Setup
E > Rate Control Setup
H > MAC Learning Setup
[MISC]
W > Unit Load Default and Reset
Figure 5-12 Ethernet Interface Card with Switch VT-100 Menu Tree
207

5.42.2 Choosing a Trib Unit
Press U from the O9400S Main Menu to choose a unit.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
17:11:39 03/21/2008
Serial Number
: 000012
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 09:29:54 03/21/2008
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
A prompt will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the cards Tributary slot number. TG3 is the
unit you want for the Ethernet card with switch.. Press the Enter key.
==>> Press Tab key to select the unit: TG3
The unit menu will appear for that card.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Unit Menu ===
11:27:26 08/27/2009
HW Version
: B
[DISPLAY]
C -> WAN(VCG) & Link Display
H -> Enet SNCP Status
G -> WAN(VCG) Statistics
I -> Switch Status
[SETUP]
M -> Mode Setup
S -> VCG & Link Setup
L -> Loopback Test
T -> Switch Setup
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
W -> Unit Load Default & Reset
208
5.42.3 Mode Setup

The path for Mode Setup is as follows:
M> Mode Setup
The Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting. Then press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Mode Setup ===
17:39:47 03/21/2008
Mode Selection : e-line

Table 5-44 Mode Setting Options

Field
Setting
Default Setting
Note
Mode Selection
e-line,
e-lan,
portmap
e-line
e-lan settings must be used if you

wish to use the Ethernet switch for
VLAN
portmap settings must be used if
you wish to use the Ethernet switch
for Port Mapping
Table 5-45 Mode Support Table

Daughter Card
Fast-Ethernet SW
Giga-Ethernet SW
Fast-Ethernet
Giga-Ethernet
E-Line
Yes--(4 WAN / 4
LAN)
Yes--(1 WAN / 1
LAN)
Yes--(4 LAN)
Yes--(1 LAN)
E-LAN
Yes--(8 WAN / 4
LAN)
Yes--(1 WAN / 4
LAN)
N/A
N/A
Portmap
Yes--(8 WAN / 4
LAN)
Yes--(1 WAN / 4
LAN)
N/A
N/A
Note: Please refer to Section 3.7.4, Functional Block Diagrams

A prompt will ask if you wish to change to this new configuration. Press Y for yes.
A prompt will advise you that the change was successful.

SUCCESS
5.42.4 VCG & Link Setup

The Unit Menu path for VCG & Link Setup is as follows:
S > WAN (VCG) & Link Setup
209

The VCG & LinkSetup screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== VCG & Link Setup ===
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:58:31 09/03/2009
Payload/LCAS Setup
Encapsulation Type Setup
Encapsulation Parameter Setup
Path Alarm Setup
VCG Alarm Threshold Setup
Linkdown Alarm Setup
Link Config Setup
Link Fail Propagation Setup
Inter-Frame Gap(IFG) Setup
Press one of the following:

F-> Linkdown Alarm Setup
Screen by screen setup examples are shown below:
5.42.4.1 Payload/LCAS Setup
The Unit Menu path for Payload/LCAS Setup is as follows:
The Payload/LCAS Setup Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: The user needs to check to make sure that there is no cross-conect map in this WAN
before changing the payload or LCAS type.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== Payload/LCAS Setup ===
[WAN]
WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)
:
:
:
:
[payload]
[lcas mode]
TU12
TU12
TU12
TU12
LCAS
LCAS
LCAS
LCAS
210
17:48:51 03/21/2008
Table 5-46 Payload/LCAS Setting Options

VCG Field
Payload
Settings
Default
Payload
Setting
LCAS
Mode
Settings
LCAS Mode
Default
Setting
Note:
TU11
TU12
LCAS,
TU12
LCAS
TU3
Non LCAS
AU4/C4
AU3/C3
*This setting depends on the card type. Please refer to Table 5-38.
WAN1~8*
The following prompt will appear. Press Y to change the configuration. If you want to save
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V
5.42.4.2 Encapsulation Type Setup

The Unit Menu path for Encapsulation Type Setup is as follows:
The Encapsulation Type Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Encapsulation Type Setup ===
17:53:33 03/21/2008
Encapsulation Type
WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)
:
:
:
:
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
Table 5-47 Encapsulation Type Setting Options

Field
Type
Encapsulation
Type Settings
Default
Setting
GFP
LAPS
BCP
GFP
Note
211

5.42.4.3 Encapsulation Parameter Setup
The Unit Menu path for Encapsulation Parameter Setup is as follows:
The Encapsulation Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the (VCG) WAN# field. Then key in the WAN# setting. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Encapsulation Par Setup ===
17:55:19 03/21/2008
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Table 5-48 Encapsulation Parameter Setting Options

Field
Setting Range
Default
Setting
(VCG) WAN#
1~8*
Note
WAN# depends on the Ethernet mode in use.

e-line = WAN1~4
e-lan and portmap = WAN1~8
If your encapsulation type is GFP, the GFP Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the various fields. Some settings must be keyed in. Some
must be scrolled in using the Tab key. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== GFP Parameter Setup ===
17:59:25 03/21/2008
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx PTI
Rx EXI
Rx UPI
DELTA
:
:
:
:
0
0
1
1
Rx Descramble
: Enable
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
PTI
EXI
UPI
PFI
Tx Scramble
:
:
:
:
0
0
1
0
: Enable
Table 5-49 GFP Parameter Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Rx PTI
Rx EXI
Rx UPI
DELTA
Rx Descramble
Tx PTI
Tx EXI
Tx UPI
Tx PFI
Tx Scramble
0~7
0~0xF
0~0xFF
1~4
Disable, Enable
0~7
0~0xF
0~0xFF
0~1
Disable, Enable
0
0
01
1
Enable
0
0
01
1
Enable
212
Note

If your encapsulation type is LAPS, the LAPS Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== LAPS Parameter Setup ===
18:01:11 03/21/2008
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Address
Control
SAPI MSB
SAPI LSB
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Address
Control
SAPI MSB
SAPI LSB
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Descramble
Payload FCS Check
Address&Control Check
SAPI Check
:
:
:
:
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
: Disable
: Disable
Table 5-50 LAPS Parameter Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Rx Address
Rx Control
Rx SAPI MSB
Rx SAPI LSB
Rx Descramble
Rx Payload FCS Check
Rx Address & Control Check
Rx SAPI Check
Tx Address
Tx Control
Tx SAPI MSB
Tx SAPI LSB
Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS Insert
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
4
03
FE
01
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
04
03
FE
01
Enable
Disable
Note
If your encapsulation type is BCP, the BCP Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
Unit TG3 FE-SW
=== BCP Parameter Setup ===
14:35:09 12/02/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~0xFF, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Address
Control
Protocol MSB
Protocol LSB
:
:
:
:
FF
3
0
31
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Descramble
Payload FCS Check
Protocol Check
:
:
:
:
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Tx Scramble
Tx/Rx Payload FCS Mode
: Enable
: Enable
: CRC-32
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Bit F
Bit Z
Pads
MAC Type
:
:
:
:
0
1
0
1
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
:
:
:
:
Rx BCP Flags Check

Rx MAC Type Check
Address
Control
Protocol MSB
Protocol LSB
Bit F
Bit Z
Pads
MAC Type
: Disable
: Disable
213
:
:
:
:
FF
3
0
31
0
1
0
1
Table 5-51 BCP Parameter Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Rx Address
Rx Control
Rx Protocol MSB
Rx Protocol LSB
Rx Descramble
Rx Protocol Check
Tx Address
Tx Control
Tx Protocol MSB
Tx Protocol LSB
Tx Scramble
Rx Bit F
Rx Bit Z
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
CRC-16/CRC-32
0/1
0/1
FF
03
0
31
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
FF
03
0
31
Enable
Enable
CRC-32
0
1
Rx Pads
Rx MAC Type
Rx BCP Flags Check
Rx MAC Type Check
Tx F
Tx Z
Tx Pads
Tx MAC Type
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
0/1
0/1
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0
1
Disable
Disable
0
1
0
1
Note
5.42.4.4 Path Alarm Setup

The Unit Menu path for Path Alarm Setup is as follows:
The Path Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Path Alarm Setup ===
09:37:41 03/24/2008
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Table 5-52 Path Alarm Setting Options 1

Field
Settings
Default
Setting
(VCG) WAN#
Path
Range is 1~4*
low-order,
214
Note

high-order
An advanced Path Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
09:37:41 03/24/2008
(VCG) WAN# :
type
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-RDI-P
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-REI
LP-BIP
alarm
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
relay
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
severity
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO

Low-order
Path Type
Alarm
Settings
Alarm
Default
Relay
Settings
Relay
Default
Severity
Settings
Severity
Default
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-RDI-P
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-REI
LP-BIP
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
Hi-order
Path Type
AU-LOP
AU-AIS
HP-UNEQ
HP-RDI-P
HP-RDI-S
HP-RDI-C
HP-B3-REI
HP-B3-BIP
HOP-LOM
Alarm
Settings
ENABLED
DISABLED
Alarm
Default
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
Relay
Settings
ENABLED
DISABLED
Relay
Default
DISABLED
Severity
Settings
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
Severity
Default
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V.
5.42.4.5 WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup

The Unit Menu path for WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup is as follows:
E > WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup
The WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Threshold
settings must be keyed in. Press the Enter key.
215

Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== WAN(VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup === 10:10:09 03/24/2008
En/Dis
Rx error FCS count
DIS
Rx error packet discarded count DIS
severity
CRIT
CRIT
Threshold
03000
03000
Table 5-54 WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setting Options

Field
En/Dis
Settings
En/Dis
Default
Severity
Settings
Severity
Default
Threshold
Settings
Threshold
Default
Rx error FCS count

Rx errore FCS packet
discarded count
EN
DIS
DIS
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
MINR
1~99999
3000
5.42.4.6 Linkdown Alarm Setup

The Unit Menu path for Linkdown Alarm Setup is as follows:
The Linkdown Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Linkdown Mask Setup ===
port
alarm
relay
severity
----------------------------------------LAN1
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN2
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN3
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN4
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
216
10:14:12 03/24/2008
Table 5-55 Linkdown Alarm Setting Options

Port
Alarm
Settings
Alarm
Default
Relay
Settings
Relay
Default
Severity
Settings
Severity
Default
LAN1~4*
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
MINR
5.42.4.7 Link Config Setup

The Unit Menu path for Link Config Setup is as follows:
The Link Config Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Link Config Setup ===
10:15:53 03/24/2008
port
link config
---------------------------LAN1
Auto negotiation
LAN2
Auto negotiation
LAN3
Auto negotiation
LAN4
Auto negotiation
Table 5-56 Link Config Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Port
Link Config Settings
Default Setting
Note
LAN4
Auto negotiation
Auto negotiation
1000M full-duplex is available in

Fast Ethernet SW, Giga Ethernet
SW and Giga Ethernet.Card.
Auto negotiation
The MTU (Maximum Transfer

Unit) of 10 M (full/half duplex) is
up to 5000 bytes
100M full-duplex
10M full-duplex
100M half-duplex
10M half-duplex
1000M full-duplex
LAN1~3
Auto negotiation
100M full-duplex
10M full-duplex
100M half-duplex
10M half-duplex
217

The Unit Menu path for Customer Information Setup is as follows:
The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Then key in the customer name for each LAN. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Customer Information Setup ===
Port#
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4
10:18:31 03/24/2008
Customer Information
Name of link#1______
Name of link#2
Name of link#3
Name of link#4
5.42.4.9 Link Failure Propagation Setup

Note: Local LAN Port failure is reflected upstream at the WAN Port. The Ethernet port of
each device is monitored. If a link failure is detected at either device a signal will
automatically be sent to the other device to shut down the corresponding Ethernet port. Thus,
the shut down of an Ethernet port is propagated.
Similarly, if WAN (VCG) port failure occurs, link failure propagation will shut down the
corresponding LAN ports.
The Unit Menu path for Link Failure Propagation is as follows:
S > VCG & Link Setup
I > Link Fail Propagation
Table 5-57 Link Failure Propagation Setting Options
Field
WAN (VCG) Lost
Propagation
Settings
Default Setting
Note
DISABLED
Link Failure Propagation only works

when in E-line or PortMap/Trunk
mode.
ENABLED,
DISABLED
Remote Link Down

Propagation
218
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Link Fail Propagation Setup ===
21:16:02 O7/01/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, ENTER KEY: ITEM SELECT
Wan(VCG) Lost PROPAGATION
: ENABLED
Remote link Down Propagation : ENABLED
Note:
Remote Link Down Propagation is only supported in GFP mode.
Note:
For E-Line mode, Link Fault Propagation is activated if a WAN1 alarm occurs or if a LAN1
alarm occurs. See the diagram below.
Table 5-58 Link Fault PropagationE-Line Mode

Link Fault Propagation
Activated by Alarm
WAN1 Alarm
LAN1 Alarm
Yes
Yes
For Portmap/Trunk modes, Link Fault Propagation is activated if a WAN1 and WAN2 alarm
both occur or if a LAN1 alarm occurs. See the diagram below.
Trunk
LAN1
WAN1
WAN1
WAN2
WAN2
LAN1
Table 5-59 Link Fault PropagationPortmap/Trunk Mode

Activated by Alarm
WAN1 Alarm
WAN2 Alarm
No
No
219
WAN1 Alarm &

WAN2 Alarm
Yes
LAN1 Alarm
Yes

5.42.4.10 Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup
The Unit Menu path for Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup is as follows:
Table 5-60 Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setting Options
Field
Settings
Default Setting
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
88
88
88
88
Note
Input your settings. Press the Enter key.

Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== Inter-Frame Gap(IFG) Setup ===
11:03:03 09/03/2009

Port
IFG (Bit Times)
------
---------------
LAN1
88
LAN2
88
LAN3
88
LAN4
88

The Unit Menu path for Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
Then press one of the following:
220

The Unit Menu path for Clear Performance Data is as follows:
A prompt will ask if you want to clear the performance data. Press Y for Yes or N for No.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Performance Setup/Clear ===
10:20:55 03/24/2008

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu or enter a command >>

The Unit Menu path for Performance Threshold Setup is as follows:
The Performance threshold Cross Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Setup ===10:21:34 03/24/2008
Monitor Point
HP-BIP(B3)
HP-REI
LP-BIP(V5)
LP-REI(V5)
LP-BIP(B3)
LP-REI(B3)
En/Dis
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
severity
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
Threshold
02400
02400
00600
00600
02400
19200
Table 5-61 Performance Threshold Setting Options

Monitor
Point
EN/DIS
Settings
EN/DIS
Default
Severity
Settings
Severity
Default
Threshold
Settings
Threshold
Default
HP-BIP(B3)
HP-REI
LP-BIP(V5)
LP-REI(V5
LP-BIP(B3)
LP-REI(B3)
EN
DIS
EN
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
INFO
1~99999
02400
02400
00600
00600
02400
19200
221
5.42.6 Loopback Test

The Unit Menu path for Loopback is as follows:
L > Loopback Test
The following Loopback Test screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== Loopback Test ===
WAN#1(GE) : *OFF
12:44:46 08/27/2009
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
Table 5-62 Loopback Test Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
WAN#1 (GE)
OFF, TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
Notes
5.42.7 SNCP User Command

The Unit Menu path for SNCP User Command is as follows:
The following SNCP User Command screen will appear. Input your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
13:03:18 08/27/2009
(VCG) WAN# :
Chan#
:
Command
:
1_
01
NONE
Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch
Table 5-63 SNCP Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
(VCG) WAN#
Chan#
Command
1
Range is 1 to 64
CLEAR, Lock-out,
FS-WA, MS-WA, FSEA, MS-EA,
1
01
CLEAR
222
Notes
5.42.8 Switch Setup

The Unit Menu path for Switch Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
The following VLAN Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== Switch Setup ===
A
B
C
D
F
G
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:57:29 10/29/2008
VLAN Setup
PortMap Setup
Port Trunk Setup
MSTP/RSTP Setup
Flow Control Setup
Qos Setup

5.42.8.1 VLAN Setup
The Unit Menu path for VLAN Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
The VLAN Setup screen will appear. Press A, B, or C.
Note: You will not be able to access this screen unless you have already set the Ethernet
Switch card to an e-lan mode setting. (Please refer to Section 5.15, SDH/SONET Mode
Setup.)
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Setup ===
16:44:20 03/24/2008
A -> VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup

B -> VLAN Port Configuration Setup
C -> VLAN Port Association Setup
VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup

The Unit Menu path for VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
A -> VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup
223

The VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup screen will appear. Key in the VLAN TPID setting. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setup ===
10:49:33 03/24/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~9, A~F, BACKSPACE to edit
VLAN
TPID
: 0x8100
Table 5-64 VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setting Options

Field
VLAN TPID
Settings
Key in setting
Default Setting
0x8100
Note
Use characters 0~9
and A~F
VLAN Port Configuration Setup

The Unit Menu path for VLAN Port Configuration Setup is as follows
T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
B -> VLAN Port Configuration Setup
The VLAN Port Configuration Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the Port#
setting. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Port Configuration Setup ===
Port# :
WAN1
10:54:51 03/24/2008
Table 5-65 VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setting Options for Screen 1

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Note
Port#
WAN1~8*
WAN1
LAN 1~4*
An updated screen will appear. Enter your settings and press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Port Configuration Setup === 10:54:51 03/24/2008
Port# :
WAN1
Port VLAN ID(PVID)
: 0001
Port Force_untag_out
: Disable
224
Table 5-66 VLAN Tag Protocol ID Setting Options for Screen 2

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Note
Port VLAN ID(PVID)
Setting range is:

1~4094
Enable
Disable
0001
Key in your setting
Port untagged out
Disable for WAN,

Enable for LAN
VLAN Port Association Setup

The Unit Menu path for VLAN Port Port Association Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
A > VLAN Setup
C -> VLAN Port Association Setup
The VLAN Port Association Setup screen will appear. Key in your setting. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Port Association Setup ===
11:01:54 03/24/2008
VID# :
0001
Table 5-67 VLAN Port Association ID Setting Options for Screen 1

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Note
VID#
Setting range is:

1~4094
0001
Key in your setting
An updated screen will appear. Enter your settings and press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== VLAN Port Association Setup ===
VID# :
0001
( valid )
WAN1(FE) : ON
WAN2(FE) : ON
WAN3(FE) : ON
WAN4(FE) : ON
WAN5(FE) : ON
WAN6(FE) : ON
WAN7(FE) : ON
WAN8(FE) : ON
LAN1(FE) : ON
LAN2(FE) : ON
LAN3(FE) : ON
LAN4(FE) : ON
Filter Broadcast: No
225
11:01:54 03/24/2008
Table 5-68 VLAN Port Association ID Setting Options for Screen 2

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Note
ON, OFF
ON
WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*
Filter Broadcast
No, Yes
No
5.42.8.2 Port Map Setup

The Unit Menu path for Port Map Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
B > Port Map Setup
The Port Map Setup screen will appear. Press A or B.
Note: You will not be able to access this screen unless you have already set the Ethernet
Switch
card to the Port Map mode setting. (Please refer to Section 5.15, Mode Setup).
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== PortMap Setup ===
11:34:18 03/24/2008
A -> WAN PortMap Setup

B -> LAN PortMap Setup
WAN PortMap Setup

The Unit Menu path for WAN PortMap Setup is as follows:
A > WAN PortMap Setup
The WAN PortMap Setup screen will appear. Scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== WAN PortMap Setup ===
11:35:41 03/24/2008
port WAN1(FE) WAN2(FE) WAN3(FE) WAN4(FE) WAN5(FE) WAN6(FE) WAN7(FE) WAN8(FE)

destination
WAN1(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN2(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN3(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN4(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN5(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN6(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN7(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
WAN8(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
LAN1(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
LAN2(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
LAN3(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
LAN4(FE) off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
226
Table 5-69 WAN Port Map Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Note
on, off
off
WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*
LAN Port Map Setup

The Unit Menu path for LAN PortMap Setup is as follows:
B > LAN PortMap Setup
The LAN PortMap Setup screen will appear. Scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== LAN PortMap Setup ===
11:37:43 03/24/2008
port LAN1(FE) LAN2(FE) LAN3(FE) LAN4(FE)

destination
WAN1(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN2(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN3(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN4(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN5(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN6(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN7(FE) off
off
off
off
WAN8(FE) off
off
off
off
LAN1(FE) off
off
off
off
LAN2(FE) off
off
off
off
LAN3(FE) off
off
off
off
LAN4(FE) off
off
off
off
Table 5-70 LAN Port Map Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Note
on, off
off
WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*
227

5.42.8.3 Port Trunk Setup
The Unit Menu path for Port Trunk Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
C > Port Trunk Setup
The Port Trunk Setup screen will appear.
Note: The screen below will appear exactly as shown for Fast Ethernet card e-lan mode and
port mapping mode. For Gigabit Ethernet only WAN#1 will appear on the screen.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Port Trunk Setup ===
trunk1
trunk2
trunk3
trunk4
member\leader port
WAN1
none
none
none
WAN#1(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#2(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#3(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#4(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#5(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#6(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#7(FE)
off
off
off
off
WAN#8(FE)
off
off
off
off
LAN#1(FE)
off
off
off
off
LAN#2(FE)
off
off
off
off
LAN#3(FE)
off
off
off
off
LAN#4(GE)
off
off
off
off
17:42:56 10/21/2008
Table 5-71 Port Trunk Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Trunk 1
Trunk 2
Trunk 3
member/
leader port
Wan 1-8,
LAN 1-4,
none
Wan 1-8,
LAN 1-4,
none
Wan 1-8,
LAN 1-4,
none
Settings
Trunk 4
Trunk Default
Settings
Wan 1-8, none
LAN 1-4,
none
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4
on,
off
on,
off
on,
off
on,
off
Field
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
228
off
Note

5.42.8.4 MSTP/RSTP Setup
The Unit Menu path for MSTP/RSTP Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
The Switch Setup screen will appear. Press A, B, C, D, E or F.
Note: MSTP is accessible only when the Loop device is in E-LAN mode. RSTP is accessible
only when the Loop device is in E-LINE mode or PORTMAP mode. To set the mode
refer to Section 5.39.3 Mode Setup.
O9400SA
=== MSTP/RSTP Setup ===
A
B
C
D
E
F
->
->
->
->
->
->
14:12:44 25/38/20UU
MSTP Region/CIST Setup

Spantree Port Enable
MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup
MSTP Instance/Priority Setup
MSTP/RSTP Port Setup
RSTP Bridge Setup
A. MSTP Region/CIST Setup

The Unit Menu path for MSTP Region/CIST Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
A -> MSTP Region/CIST Setup
The MSTP Region/CIST screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Region/CIST Setup ===
17:14:39 25/38/20UU
STP : Disable
Region Name : MSTname
Revision
: 00001
Bridge ID MAC ADDR : 00-1F-BF-BF-0F-62
Bridge ID Priority : 32768 (MST instance 0)
Hello Time : 02 sec
229
Forward Delay :
15 sec
Table 5-72 MSTP Region/CIST Setup

Field
Setting Options
Default
Settings
STP
Region Name
Revision
Bridge ID MAC ADDR
Enable, Disable
MST name
00001
Bridge ID Priority
Bridge Max Age
Hello Time
Forward Delay
Setting range is: 0~65535

Notes
This setting is for display only. It

cannot be changed on this screen.
32768
20 sec.
02 sec
15 sec
B. Spantree Port Enable

The Unit Menu path for Spantree Port Enable is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
B -> Spantree Port Enable
The Spantree Port Enable screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== Spantree Port Enable ===
Port
Spantree
--------- ----------WAN#1(GE)
enable
LAN#1(FE)
enable
LAN#2(FE)
enable
LAN#3(FE)
enable
LAN#4(GE)
enable
17:27:02 25/38/20UU
Table 5-73 Spantree Port Enable Setting Options

Field
Setting Options
Default Settings
WAN#1(GE)
LAN#1(FE)
LAN#2(FE)
LAN#3(FE)
LAN#4(GE)
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Notes
C. MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup

The Unit Menu path for MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
C -> MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup
230

The MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup ===
17:27:38 25/38/20UU
MST instance :01
Table 5-74 MSTP Instance/Vlan Setting Options #1

Field
Setting Options
Default Settings
MST Intance
Range is 1 to 64
O1
Notes
An expanded screen will appear. You will be given the option to either Add or Delete. Use
the Tab key to scroll in your choice. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Instance/Vlan Setup ===
MST instance :01
Priority : 32768
Delete from Vlan#0001 to Vlan#0001
15:19:45 18/09/20UU
D. MSTP Instance/Priority Setup

The Unit Menu path for MSTP Instance/Priority Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
D -> MSTP Instance/Priority Setup
The MSTP Instance/Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Instance/Priority Setup === 17:28:05 25/38/20UU
MST instance :01
231
Table 5-75 MSTP Instance/Priority Settng Options

Field
Setting Options
Default Settings
Notes
MST Instance
Range is 1 to 64
01
Only applicable in E-Lan

mode
An expanded screen will appear. You will be given the option to either Add or Delete. Use the
Tab key to scroll in your choice. Press the Enter key.
E. MSTP/RSTP Port Setup

The Unit Menu path for MSTP/RSTP Port Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
E > MSTP/RSTP Port Setup
Either the MSTP Port Setup screen or the RSTP Port Setup screen will appear depending on
what mode you are in (ie. E-LAN for MSTP, E-LINE fort RSTP). Enter your settings. Press
the Enter key.
Note: For MSTP you must first select an MST instance.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Port Setup ===
17:28:30 25/38/20UU
MST instance :00
Table 5-76 MST instance Setting Options

Field
Setting Options
Default Settings
MST Intance
Range is 1 to 64
01
Notes
An expanded screen will appear. Scroll in your settings for each port (eg. WAN#1, LAN#1, etc).
Press the Enter key. An MSTP screen is shown below.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== MSTP Port Setup ===
Port
Role
State Cost
Prio Edg-P
------------------- ----- --------- ---- ----WAN#1(GE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
LAN#1(FE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
LAN#2(FE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
LAN#3(FE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
LAN#4(GE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
MST instance:0
232
15:45:32 18/09/20UU
Type
Boundary
-------- -----------auto
Internal
auto
Internal
auto
Internal
auto
Internal
auto
Internal
Table 5-77 MSTP Port Setting Options

Port
Field
Settings
Default Setting
WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*
Cost
019
Prio
128
Edg-p
No, Yes
No
P-P
No, Yes
No
*E-LAN mode must be used if you wish to use the Ethernet switch for VLAN. Portmap mode must be
used if you wish to use the Ethernet switch for Port Mapping. Please refer to Table 5-37.
The RSTP screen appears as shown below. Scroll in your settings for each port (eg. WAN#1,
LAN#1, etc). Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== RSTP Port Setup ===
16:05:23 18/09/20UU
Port
Role
State Cost
Prio Edg-P
Type
------------------- ----- --------- ---- ----- -------WAN#1(GE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
auto
LAN#4(GE)
disabled
Blk 000003392 128 No
auto
Table 5-78 RSTP Port Setting Options

Port
Field
Settings
Default Setting
WAN1~8*
LAN1~4*
Cost
019
Prio
128
Edg-p
No, Yes
No
Type
auto, share, pt. to pt.
auto
*E-LAN mode must be used if you wish to use the Ethernet switch for VLAN. Portmap mode must be
used if you wish to use the Ethernet switch for Port Mapping. Please refer to Table 5-37.
F. RSTP Bridge Setup

The Unit Menu path for RSTP Bridge Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
D > MSTP/RSTP Setup
F > RSTP Bridge Setup
The RSTP Bridge Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: The screen below is for Ethernet with a switch. The screen for Ethernet without a
switch will be different.
Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== RSTP Bridge Setup ===
14:15:52 25/38/20UU
STP : Disable
Bridge ID MAC ADDR : 00-1F-BF-BF-0F-62

Bridge ID Priority : 32768
Hello Time :
02 sec
Forward Delay :
15 sec
Note: Bridge max. age must be 2 x (Hello time+1) and 2 x (Forward Delay 1).
233

Table 5-79 RSTP Bridge Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Field
Settings
Default Setting
RSTP
Bridge ID MAC ADDR
Bridge ID Priority
Enable, Disable
Disable
Setting range is:

0~65535
32768
Bridge Max Age

Hello Time
Forward Delay
Note
20 sec.
02 sec
15 sec
5.42.8.5 IGMP Setup

The Unit Menu path for IGMP Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
The Switch Setup screen will appear. Press A, B, C, D, E or F.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Setup ===
A
B
C
D
E
F
->
->
->
->
->
->
IGMP
IGMP
IGMP
IGMP
IGMP
IGMP
13:38:32 02/02/2010
Snooping
Fast Leave
Router Port
IP Multicast Range
Cross Vlan I
Cross Vlan II
A. IGMP Snooping
The Unit Menu path for RSTP Bridge Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
A > IGMP Snooping
The IGMP Snooping screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Snooping ===
IGMP Snooping
: OFF
Last Query Interval : 00000 (milli-seconds)
234
14:13:22 02/02/2010

Table 5-80 IGMP Snooping Setting Options
Field
IGMP Snooping
Last Query Interval
(in milli-seconds)
Setting Options
ON, OFF
0 ~ 65535
Default Setting
OFF
00000
Note
B. IGMP Fast Leave

The Unit Menu path for IGMP Fast Leave is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
B > IGMP Fast Leave
The IGMP fast leave screen will appear. Enter a number between 1 to 4094 and press enter.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Fast Leave ===
17:02:22 02/02/2010
VID# :
0001
Then the system will ask you to set the Vid IGMP Fast Leave. Use Tab to select and press
enter after you have made your setting.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Fast Leave ===
VID# :
0001
Vid IGMP Fast Leave : OFF
235
17:07:00 02/02/2010

C. IGMP Router Port
The Menu path for IGMP Router Port is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
C > IGMP Router Port
The IGMP Router Port screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Router Port ===
Router Port
WAN#1(FE): No
WAN#2(FE): No
WAN#3(FE): No
WAN#4(FE): No
WAN#5(FE): No
WAN#6(FE): No
WAN#7(FE): No
WAN#8(FE): No
LAN#1(FE): No
LAN#2(FE): No
LAN#3(FE): No
LAN#4(GE): No
17:11:04 02/02/2010
Table 5-81 IGMP Router Port Setting Options

Field
WAN1~ 8
LAN1 ~ 3, LAN4(GE)
Setting Options
Yes, No
Yes, No
Default Setting
No
No
D. IP Multicast Range
The Menu path for IGMP IP Multicast Range is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
D > IGMP IP Multicast Range
The IGMP IP Multicast Range screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP IP Multicast Range ===
17:19:40 02/02/2010
Please Input: 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255, BACKSPACE to edit
MC IP - start
MC IP - end
WAN1
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN2
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN3
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN4
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN5
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN6
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN7
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
WAN8
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
LAN1
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
LAN2
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
LAN3
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
LAN4
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
Only multicast IPs between 'start' and 'end' are acceptable for that port.
236

Table 5-82 IP Multicast Range Setting Options
Field
MC IP start
MC IP end
Setting Options
From 224.0.1.0 to
239.255.255.255
Default Setting
Note
The multicast range from
224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255 is not
configurable. Packets with
multicast IPs in this range are
always passed.
E. IGMP Cross Vlan I

The Menu path for IGMP Cross Vlan is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
E > IGMP Cross Vlan
The IGMP Cross Vlan screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Cross Vlan I ===
IGMP Cross Vlan
: OFF
IGMP Cross VlanID : 0000
Multicast IP
WAN#1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LAN#1 2 3 4
1 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
2 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
3 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
4 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
5 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
6 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
7 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
8 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
9 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
10 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
11 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
12 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
13 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
14 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
15 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
16 000.000.000.000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
17:29:56 02/02/2010
Table 5-83 IGMP Cross Vlan Setting Options

Field
IGMP Cross Vlan
IGMP Cross Vlan ID
Multicast IP
WAN1 ~ WAN8
LAN1 ~ LAN4
Setting Options
ON, OFF
1 ~ 4094
224.0.1.0 to
239.255.255.255
0, 1
Default Setting
OFF
Note
0 = port is not selected

1 = selected
Use the tab key to make this
configuration.
237

F. IGMP Cross Vlan II
The Menu path for IGMP Cross Vlan is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
E > IGMP Setup
F > IGMP Cross Vlan
The IGMP Cross Vlan screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== IGMP Cross Vlan II ===
18:21:48 02/02/2010
Please Input: 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255, BACKSPACE to edit
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Multicast IP
WAN#1
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LAN#1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table 5-84 IGMP Cross Vlan Setting Options

Field
Multicast IP (17 ~ 32)
Setting Options
224.0.1.0 to
239.255.255.255
Default Setting
WAN1~WAN8
LAN1 ~ LAN4
Note
0 means the port is not
selected for the
corresponding multicast IP,
whereas 1 means the port is
selected. Use the tab key to
make this configuration.
5.42.8.6 Flow Control Setup

The Unit Menu path for Flow Control Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
F > Flow Control Setup
The Flow Control Setup screen will appear.
port mapping mode. In e-line mode only four WAN ports (WAN#1-WAN#4) will appear on the
screen. For Gigabit Ethernet only WAN#1 will appear on the screen.
238

Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Flow Control Setup ===
port
Flow control
Asymmetric
WAN#1(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#2(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#3(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#4(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#5(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#6(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#7(FE) :ON
OFF
WAN#8(FE) :ON
OFF
LAN#1(FE) :ON
OFF
LAN#2(FE) :ON
OFF
LAN#3(FE) :ON
OFF
LAN#4(GE) :ON
OFF
17:43:53 10/21/2008
Table 5-85 Flow Control Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Field
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
Flow
Control
ON,
OFF
Default
Setting
ON
Assymetric
ON,
OFF
Settings
Default
Setting
OFF
Note
5.42.8.7 QoS Setup

The Unit Menu path for QoS Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
G > QoS Setup
The Qos Setup screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Qos Setup ===
A
B
C
D
E
->
->
->
->
->
17:44:50 10/21/2008
Class of Service Setup

TCP/UDP Port Access Control
Transmission Scheduling
Transmission WRED Setup
Rate Control Setup
239

5.42.8.7.1
Class of Service Setup
The Unit Menu path for Class of Service Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
F > QoS Setup
A > Class of Service Setup
The following screen will appear. Press A, B, C, D or E.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
= Class of Service Setup =
A
B
C
D
E
->
->
->
->
->
17:45:12 10/21/2008
Priority Mode Setup

Fixed Priority Setup
Vlan Tag Priority Setup
TOS field Priority Setup
Distrusted Port Setup
Priority Mode Setup

The Unit Menu path for Priority Mode Setup is as follows:
A > Priority Mode Setup
The Priority Mode Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Priority Mode Setup ===
17:46:00 10/21/2008
WAN#1(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#2(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#3(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#4(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#5(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#6(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#7(FE)
Tag/TOS
WAN#8(FE)
Tag/TOS
LAN#1(FE)
Tag/TOS
LAN#2(FE)
Tag/TOS
LAN#3(FE)
Tag/TOS
LAN#4(GE)
Tag/TOS
Packet Priority : Tag
Table 5-86 Priority Mode Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Field
WAN#1 (FE)
WAN#2 (FE)
WAN#3 (FE)
WAN#4 (FE)
WAN#5 (FE)
WAN#6 (FE)
WAN#7 (FE)
WAN#8 (FE)
LAN#1 (FE)
LAN#2 (FE)
LAN#3 (FE)
LAN#4 (FE)
Packet Priority
Setting Options
Tag/TOS,
Fixed
Default Setting
Tag/TOS
Tag, TOS
Tag
240
Note

Fixed Priority Setup
The Unit Menu path for Fixed Priority Setup is as follows:
B > Fixed Priority Setup
The Fixed Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Fixed Priority Setup ===
Transmission priority
Drop precedence
WAN#1(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#2(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#3(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#4(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#5(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#6(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#7(FE)
P0
low-drop
WAN#8(FE)
P0
low-drop
LAN#1(FE)
P0
low-drop
LAN#2(FE)
P0
low-drop
LAN#3(FE)
P0
low-drop
LAN#4(GE)
P0
low-drop
17:46:17 10/21/2008
Table 5-87 Fixed Priority Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Field
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
Transmission
Priority Setting
Options
Default
Setting
Drop
Precedence
Setting Options
Default
Setting
P0,
P1,
P2,
P3
P0
low-drop,
high-drop
low-drop
Note
VLAN Tag Priority Setup

The Unit Menu path for VLAN Tag Priority Setup is as follows:
C > VLAN Tag Priority Setup
The VLAN Tag Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Vlan Tag Priority Setup ===
Tag priority
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
Drop precedence
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
241
17:46:38 10/21/2008

Table 5-88 VLAN Tag Priority Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Tag Priority
Field
Transmission
Priority Setting
Options
Default
Setting
Drop
Precedence
Setting Options
Default
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P0,
P1,
P2,
P3
P0
low-drop,
high-drop
low-drop
Note
TOS Field Priority Setup

The Unit Menu path for TOS Field Priority Setup is as follows:
D > TOS Field Priority Setup
The TOS Field Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== TOS field Priority Setup ===
Tos priority
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
P0
17:47:01 10/21/2008
Drop precedence
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
low-drop
TOS field: [4:2]

Table 5-89 TOS Field Priority Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Tag Priority
Field
Transmission
Priority Setting
Options
Default
Setting
Drop
Precedence
Setting Options
Default
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P0,
P1,
P2,
P3
P0
low-drop,
high-drop
low-drop
TOS Field
[4:2], [7:5}
[4:2]]
242
Note

Distrusted Port Setup
The Unit Menu path for Distrusted Port Setup is as follows:
E > Distrusted Port Setup
The Distrusted Port Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: Distrusted Port Setup is only available in e-lan mode.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Distrusted Port Setup ===
17:47:34 10/21/2008
Port
Distrusted
New Tag Priority(for distrusted port)
WAN#1(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#2(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#3(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#4(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#5(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#6(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#7(FE)
trusted
0
WAN#8(FE)
trusted
0
LAN#1(FE)
trusted
0
LAN#2(FE)
trusted
0
LAN#3(FE)
trusted
0
LAN#4(GE)
trusted
0
Table 5-90 Distrusted Port Setting Options

Port
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(GE)
Distrusted
Setting
Options
Default
Setting
New Tag
Priority (for
distrusted port)
Default
Setting
trusted,
distrusted
trusted
0-7
Note
5.42.8.7.2
TCP/UDP Port Access Control
The Unit Menu path for TCP/UDP Port Access Control is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
F > QoS Setup
B > TCP/UDP Port Access Control
The following screen will appear. Press A, B, or C.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
= TCP/UDP Port priority Setup =
17:47:51 10/21/2008
A -> TCP/UDP Well Known Port Priority Setup

B -> TCP/UDP User Define Port Priority Setup
C -> TCP/UDP Port Range Priority Setup
243

TCP/UDP Well Known Port Priority Setup
The Unit Menu path for TCP/UDP Well Known Port Priority Setup is as follows:
A > TCP/UDP Well Known Port Priority Setup
The Well Known Port Priority screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Well Known Port Priority ===
TCP/UDP Port
23
512
6000
443
111
22555
22
554
Port Enable
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
17:48:08 10/21/2008
Priority(tx) Precedence(drop) Discard

P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
NOTE: P0=lowest priority
TCP/UDP User Define Port Priority Setup

The Unit Menu path for TCP/UDP User Define Port Priority Setup is as follows:
B > TCP/UDP User Define Port Priority Setup
The User Define Port Priority screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== User Define Port Priority ===
17:48:22 10/21/2008
TCP/UDP Port
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
Port Enable
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
Priority(tx) Precedence(drop) Discard

P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
P0
low-drop
DISABLE
NOTE: P0=lowest priority

Table 5-91 User Define Port Priority Setting Options

TCP/UD
P Port
Settings
0-65535
Default
Setting
00000
Port
Enable
Settings
ENABLE,
DISABLE
Default
Setting
Priority
Settings
Default
Setting
Precedence
Settings
Default
Setting
Discard
Settings
Default
Setting
DISABLE
P0, P1,
P2, P3
P0
low-drop,
high-drop
lowdrop
ENABLE,
DISABLE
DISAB
LE
TCP/UDP Port Range Priority Setup

The Unit Menu path for TCP/UDP Port Range Priority Setup is as follows:
C > TCP/UDP Port Range Priority Setup
The Port Range Priority Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
244

Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Port Range Priority Setup ===
17:48:38 10/21/2008
Port Num(Min):00000
Port Num(Max):00000
Tx Priority :P0
Drop Priority:low-drop
Filtering
:NO
Table 5-92 CP/UDP Port Range Priority Settings

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Note
Port Num(Min)
Port Num(Max)
0-65535
0-65535
00000
00000
Max value must be

greater than Min.
value
Tx Priority
Drop Priority
Filtering
P0, P1, P2, P3

Low-drop, hig-drop
NO, YES
P0
low-drop
NO
5.42.8.7.3
Transmission Scheduling
The Unit Menu path for Transmission Scheduling is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
F > QoS Setup
C > Transmission Scheduling
The following screen will appear. Press A or B.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Transmission Scheduling ===
17:48:55 10/21/2008
A -> Scheduling Algorithm

B -> WFQ Weight Setup
245

Scheduling Algorithm
The Unit Menu path for Scheduling Algorithm is as follows:
A > Scheduling Algorithm
The Scheduling Algorithm screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
port mapping mode. In e-line mode only four WAN ports (WAN#1-WAN#4) will appear
on the screen. For Gigabit Ethernet only WAN#1 will appear on the screen.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW

=== Scheduling Algorithm ===
port
P0 queue
P1 queue
P2 queue
P3 queue
WAN#1(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#2(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#3(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#4(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#5(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#6(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#7(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
WAN#8(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
LAN#1(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
LAN#2(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
LAN#3(FE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
LAN#4(GE) : SP
SP
SP
SP
17:49:38 10/21/2008
SP:Strict Priority, WFQ:Weighted Fair Queuing

Table 5-93 Scheduling Algorithm Setting Options

Port
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(GE)
Queue Settings for:

P0, P1, P2 & P3
Default Setting
Note
SP, WFQ
SP
SP= Strict Priority

WFQ= Weighted Fair Queuing
WFQ Weight Setup

The Unit Menu path for WFQ Weight Setup is as follows:
B > WFQ Weight Setup
The WFQ Weight Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
246

Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== WFQ Weight Setup ===
17:49:57 10/21/2008
port
P0 queue
P1 queue
P2 queue
P3 queue
WAN#1(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#2(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#3(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#4(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#5(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#6(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#7(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
WAN#8(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
LAN#1(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
LAN#2(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
LAN#3(FE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
LAN#4(GE) : 025%
025%
025%
025%
Table 5-94 WFQ Weight Setup Setting Options

Port
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
LAN#4
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(GE)
5.42.8.7.4
Queue Settings for:

P0, P1, P2 & P3
Default Setting
0-100%
025%
Note
Transmission WRED Setup
The Unit Menu path for Transmission WRED Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup

F > QoS Setup
D > Transmission WRED Setup
The Transmission WRED Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Transmission WRED Setup ===
17:50:16 10/21/2008
X%
Y%
Z%
Level1
Level2
:
:
:
:
:
12(x6.25%)
00(x6.25%)
00(x6.25%)
0032
0064
Level1 : When destination queue size reaches Level1 threshold,

the high-drop packets will be dropped at X%,
the low-drop packets will be dropped at Y%.
Level2 : When destination queue size reaches Level2 threshold,
the high-drop packets will be dropped at 100%,
the low-drop packets will be dropped at Z%.
247
Table 5-95 Transmission WRED Setting Options

Field
Setting
Options
Default
Setting
X%
Y%
Z%
Level 1
Level 2
0-15
12
0
0
0032
0064
0-2000
5.42.8.7.5
Note
Level 1: When destination queue size reaches Leve 1 threshold,
the high-drop packets will be dropped at X%, the low-drop packets
will be dropped at Y%.
When destination queue size reaches Level1 threshold,

the high-drop packets will be dropped at X%,the low-drop
packets will be dropped at Y%.
Rate Control Setup
The Unit Menu path for Rate Control Setup is as follows:
T > Switch Setup

F > QoS Setup
E > Rate Control Setup
The following screen will appear. Press A or B.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Rate Control Setup ===
17:50:30 10/21/2008
A ->Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup

B ->Port Bitrate Setup
Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup

The Unit Menu path for Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup is as follows:
A > Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup
The Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setupscreen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setup ===
17:51:01 10/21/2008
[Rate control for egress/ingress]

Egress Rate Control: DISABLE
Ingress Rate Control: DISABLE
[Drop percentage for ingress WRED]
Ra%(granularity 6.25%): 00
Rb%(granularity 6.25%): 00
Table 5-96 Rate Ctrl/Ingress WRED Setting Options

Field
Setting Options
Egrerss Rate Control

Ingress Rate Control
Ra% (granularity 6.25%)
Rb% (granularity 6.25%)
ENABLE,
DISABLE
Default Setting
DISABLE
00
0-15
248
Note

Port Bitrate Setup
The Unit Menu path for Port Bitrate Setup is as follows:
A > Port Bitrate Setup
The Port Bitrate Setup screen will appear. Enter your settings. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== Port Bitrate Setup ===
17:51:14 10/21/2008
port
Egress rate
Ingress rate
=multiple*gran
=multiple*gran
WAN#1(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#2(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#3(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#4(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#5(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#6(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#7(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
WAN#8(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
LAN#1(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
LAN#2(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
LAN#3(FE) : 0160 x 640k
0160 x 640k
Table 5-97 Port Bitrate Setting Options

Port
WAN#1
WAN#2
WAN#3
WAN#4
WAN#5
WAN#6
WAN#7
WAN#8
LAN#1
LAN#2
LAN#3
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
(FE)
Egress Rate
Setting
Options
Default
Setting
Ingress
Rate
Setting
Options
Default
Setting
0-1600x640k,
64K
0160 x 640k
0-1600x640k,
64K
0160 x
640k
249
Note

5.42.9 MAC Learning Setup
The menu path for MAC learning is as follows:
T > Switch Setup
H > MAC Learning Setup
The MAC Learning Setup screen will appear. Use the tab key to change the setting.
Unit TG3 -FE-SW
=== MAC Learning Setup ===
18:30:38 02/02/2010
Switch MAC Learning in "e-line" Mode: Enable
Table 5-98 MAC Learning Setting Options

Field
MAC Learning
Setting Options
Enable, Disable
Default Setting
Enable
Note
The disable option is only
available in e-line mode. MAC
learning is always enabled in e-lan
and portmap mode.
5.42.10 Unit Load Default and Reset

The Unit Menu path for Unit Load Default and Reset is as follows:
Press W. The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes
Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]
Key in your password. Press the Enter key.

>>Password:
250
5.43 Ethernet No-Switch Setup

For bachground information on Ethernet please refer to CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX.
5.43.1 Unit Menu Tree
Figure 5-13 Ethernet Interface Card without Switch VT-100 Menu Tree
251
5.43.2 Choosing a Trib Unit

Press U from the O9400S Main Menu to choose a unit.
O9400SA
=== Main Menu ===
17:11:39 03/21/2008
Serial Number
: 000012
Hardware Version: D

Start Time : 09:29:54 03/21/2008
[DISPLAY]
Q -> Alarm Queue
[SETUP]
M -> Alarm Setup
L -> File Transfer
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
Y -> Alarm Cut Off
Z -> System Reset
A prompt will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in the cards Tributary slot number. Press the
Enter key.
==>> Press Tab key to select the unit: TG3
The unit menu will appear for that card.
Unit TG2 -FE
=== Unit Menu ===
09:45:06 08/28/2009
HW Version
: A
[DISPLAY]
C -> WAN(VCG) & Link Display
H -> Enet SNCP Status
G -> WAN(VCG) Statistics
[SETUP]
M -> Mode Setup
S -> VCG & Link Setup
L -> Loopback Test
[LOG]
F -> Log Off
O -> Log On
U -> Choose a Unit
[MISC]
W -> Unit Load Default & Reset
252
5.43.3 Mode Setup

The path for Mode Setup is as follows:
M> Mode Setup
The Mode Setup screen will appear. Use the Tab key to scroll in your setting. Then press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Mode Setup ===
17:39:47 03/21/2008
Mode Selection : e-line

Table 5-99 Mode Setting Options

Field
Setting
Default Setting
Mode Selection
e-line
e-line
Note
Table 5-100 Mode Support Table

Daughter Card
Fast-Ethernet
Giga-Ethernet
E-Line
Yes--(4 LAN)/4WAN
Yes--(1 LAN)/1WAN
Note: Please refer to Section 3.7.4, Functional Block Diagrams

A prompt will ask if you wish to change to this new configuration. Press Y for yes.
A prompt will advise you that the change was successful.

SUCCESS
5.43.4 WAN (VCG) & Link Setup

The Unit Menu path for VCG & Link Setup is as follows:
The VCG & LinkSetup screen will appear.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== VCG & Link Setup ===
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
11:58:31 09/03/2009
Payload/LCAS Setup
Encapsulation Type Setup
Encapsulation Parameter Setup
Path Alarm Setup
VCG Alarm Threshold Setup
Linkdown Alarm Setup
Link Config Setup
Link Fail Propagation Setup
Inter-Frame Gap(IFG) Setup
253

Press one of the following:
5.43.4.1 Payload/LCAS Setup
The Unit Menu path for Payload/LCAS Setup is as follows:
The Payload/LCAS Setup Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press the Enter key.
Note: The user needs to check to make sure that there is no cross-conect map in this WAN
before changing the payload or LCAS type.
Unit TG3 -FE

=== Payload/LCAS Setup ===
[WAN]
WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)
:
:
:
:
[payload]
[lcas mode]
TU12
TU12
TU12
TU12
LCAS
LCAS
LCAS
LCAS
17:48:51 03/21/2008
Table 5-101 Payload/LCAS Setting Options

VCG Field
Payload
Settings
Default
Payload
Setting
LCAS
Mode
Settings
LCAS Mode
Default
Setting
Note:
TU11
TU12
LCAS,
TU12
LCAS
TU3
Non LCAS
AU4/C4
AU3/C3
WAN1~4*
254
5.43.4.2 Encapsulation Type Setup

The Unit Menu path for Encapsulation Type Setup is as follows:
The Encapsulation Type Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Encapsulation Type Setup ===
17:53:33 03/21/2008
Encapsulation Type
WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)
:
:
:
:
GFP
GFP
GFP
GFP
Table 5-102 Encapsulation Type Setting Options

Field
Encapsulation
Type Settings
Type
Default
Setting
GFP
LAPS
Note
GFP
BCP
5.43.4.3 Encapsulation Parameter Setup

The Unit Menu path for Encapsulation Parameter Setup is as follows:
The Encapsulation Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the (VCG) WAN# field. Then key in the WAN# setting. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Encapsulation Par Setup ===
17:55:19 03/21/2008
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Table 5-103 Encapsulation Parameter Setting Options

Field
Setting Range
Default
Setting
(VCG) WAN#
1~4*
Note
WAN# depends on the Ethernet mode in use.

e-line = WAN1~4*
255

If your encapsulation type is GFP, the GFP Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
Unit TG3 -FE
=== GFP Parameter Setup ===
17:59:25 03/21/2008
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx PTI
Rx EXI
Rx UPI
DELTA
:
:
:
:
0
0
1
1
Rx Descramble
: Enable
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
PTI
EXI
UPI
PFI
:
:
:
:
Tx Scramble
0
0
1
0
: Enable
Table 5-104 GFP Parameter Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Rx PTI
Rx EXI
Rx UPI
DELTA
Rx Descramble
Tx PTI
Tx EXI
Tx UPI
Tx PFI
Tx Scramble
0~7
0~0xF
0~0xFF
1~4
Disable, Enable
0~7
0~0xF
0~0xFF
0~1
Disable, Enable
0
0
01
1
Enable
0
0
01
1
Enable
Note
If your encapsulation type is LAPS, the LAPS Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
Unit TG3 -FE
=== LAPS Parameter Setup ===
18:01:11 03/21/2008
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Address
Control
SAPI MSB
SAPI LSB
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Address
Control
SAPI MSB
SAPI LSB
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Descramble
Payload FCS Check
SAPI Check
:
:
:
:
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Tx Scramble
Tx Payload FCS
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
: Disable
: Disable
Table 5-105 LAPS Parameter Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Rx Address
Rx Control
Rx SAPI MSB
Rx SAPI LSB
Rx Descramble
Rx SAPI Check
Tx Address
Tx Control
Tx SAPI MSB
Tx SAPI LSB
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
4
03
FE
01
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
04
03
FE
01
256
Note

Tx Scramble
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Enable
Disable
If your encapsulation type is BCP, the BCP Parameter Setup screen will appear. Use the
Unit TG3 FE
=== BCP Parameter Setup ===
14:35:09 12/02/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 0~0xFF, BACKSPACE to edit
(VCG) WAN# : 1
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Address
Control
Protocol MSB
Protocol LSB
:
:
:
:
FF
3
0
31
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Descramble
Payload FCS Check
Protocol Check
:
:
:
:
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Tx Scramble
: Enable
: Enable
: CRC-32
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Bit F
Bit Z
Pads
MAC Type
:
:
:
:
0
1
0
1
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
:
:
:
:
Rx BCP Flags Check

Rx MAC Type Check
Address
Control
Protocol MSB
Protocol LSB
Bit F
Bit Z
Pads
MAC Type
:
:
:
:
FF
3
0
31
0
1
0
1
: Disable
: Disable
Table 5-106 BCP Parameter Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
Rx Address
Rx Control
Rx Protocol MSB
Rx Protocol LSB
Rx Descramble
Rx Protocol Check
Tx Address
Tx Control
Tx Protocol MSB
Tx Protocol LSB
Tx Scramble
Rx Bit F
Rx Bit Z
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Disable/Enable
Disable/Enable
CRC-16/CRC-32
0/1
0/1
FF
03
0
31
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
FF
03
0
31
Enable
Enable
CRC-32
0
1
Rx Pads
Rx MAC Type
Rx BCP Flags Check
Rx MAC Type Check
Tx F
Tx Z
Tx Pads
Tx MAC Type
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
0/1
0/1
0~0xFF
0~0xFF
0
1
Disable
Disable
0
1
0
1
Note
257
5.43.4.4 Path Alarm Setup

The Unit Menu path for Path Alarm Setup is as follows:
The Path Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
Unit TG3 -FE
09:37:41 03/24/2008
(VCG) WAN# : 1

Field
Settings
Default
Setting
Note
(VCG) WAN#
Path
Range is 1~4*
1
low-order,
high-order
An advanced Path Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
Unit TG3 -FE
(VCG) WAN# :
type
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-RDI-P
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-REI
LP-BIP
alarm
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
relay
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
severity
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
258
09:37:41 03/24/2008

Low-order
Path Type
Alarm
Settings
Alarm
Default
Relay
Settings
Relay
Default
Severity
Settings
Severity
Default
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-RDI-P
LP-RDI-S
LP-RDI-C
LP-REI
LP-BIP
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
Hi-order
Path Type
AU-LOP
AU-AIS
HP-UNEQ
HP-RDI-P
HP-RDI-S
HP-RDI-C
HP-B3-REI
HP-B3-BIP
HOP-LOM
Alarm
Settings
ENABLED
DISABLED
Alarm
Default
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
Relay
Settings
ENABLED
DISABLED
Relay
Default
DISABLED
Severity
Settings
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
Severity
Default
MAJR
MAJR
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
INFO
this configuration you must return to the O9400S Main Menu and press V.
5.43.4.5 WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup

The Unit Menu path for WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup is as follows:
E > WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup
The WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Threshold
settings must be keyed in. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== WAN(VCG) Alarm Threshold Setup === 10:10:09 03/24/2008
En/Dis
Rx error FCS count
DIS
Rx error packet discarded count DIS
severity
CRIT
CRIT
Threshold
03000
03000
Table 5-109 WAN (VCG) Alarm Threshold Setting Options

Field
En/Dis
Settings
En/Dis
Default
Severity
Settings
Severity
Default
Threshold
Settings
Threshold
Default
Rx error FCS count

Rx error packet
discarded count
EN
DIS
DIS
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
MINR
1~99999
3000
259
5.43.4.6 Linkdown Alarm Setup

The Unit Menu path for Linkdown Alarm Setup is as follows:
The Linkdown Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Linkdown Mask Setup ===
10:14:12 03/24/2008
port
alarm
relay
severity
----------------------------------------LAN1
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN2
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN3
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
LAN4
ENABLED
DISABLED MAJR
Table 5-110 Linkdown Alarm Setting Options

Port
Alarm
Settings
Alarm
Default
Relay
Settings
Relay
Default
Severity
Settings
Severity
Default
LAN1~4*
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
MINR
5.43.4.7 Link Config Setup

The Unit Menu path for Link Config Setup is as follows:
The Link Config Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Link Config Setup ===
port
link config
---------------------------LAN1(FE)
Auto negotiation
LAN2(FE)
Auto negotiation
LAN3(FE)
Auto negotiation
LAN4(FE)
Auto negotiation
260
10:15:53 03/24/2008
Table 5-111 Link Config Setting Options for Ethernet with Switch
Port
Link Config Settings
Default Setting
Note
LAN1(GE)
1000M full-duplex
1000M full duplex
This is for Giga Ethernet Card
LAN1~ 4(FE)
Auto negotiation
Auto negotiation
This is for Fast Ethernet Card
100M full-duplex
The MTU (Maximum Transfer

Unit) of 10 M (half/full duplex) is
up to 5000 bytes
10M full-duplex
100M half-duplex
10M half-duplex

The Unit Menu path for Customer Information Setup is as follows:
The Customer Information Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the various fields. Then key in the customer name for each LAN. Press the Enter key.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Customer Information Setup ===
10:18:31 03/24/2008
Port#
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4
Customer Information
Name of link#1______
Name of link#2
Name of link#3
Name of link#4
5.43.4.9 Link Failure Propagation Setup

Note: Local LAN Port failure is reflected upstream at the WAN Port. The Ethernet port of
each device is monitored. If a link failure is detected at either device a signal will
automatically be sent to the other device to shut down the corresponding Ethernet port. Thus,
the shut down of an Ethernet port is propagated.
Similarly, if WAN (VCG) port failure occurs, link failure propagation will shut down the
corresponding LAN ports.
The Unit Menu path for Link Failure Propagation is as follows:
261

I > Link Fail Propagation
Table 5-112 Link Failure Propagation Setting Options
Field
Settings
WAN (VCG) Lost

Propagation
Remote Link Down
Propagation
Remote Link Down
Guard Time
Default Setting
Note
ENABLED,
DISABLED
DISABLED
Link Failure Propagation only

works when in E-line or
PortMap/Trunk mode.
Range is 1 to
5 .seconds
1 second
Note: When the LAN link down time is longer than the guard time, the remote link down
propagation sends a message to force the far-end LAN to power down.
Unit TG3 -FE
=== Link Fail Propagation Setup ===
21:16:02 O7/01/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, ENTER KEY: ITEM SELECT
Wan(VCG) Lost PROPAGATION
: ENABLED
Remote link Down Propagation : ENABLED

Remote Link Guard Time
Note:
: 1 second
Remote Link Down Propagation is only supported in GFP mode.
Note:
For E-Line mode, Link Fault Propagation is activated if a WAN1 alarm occurs or if a LAN1
alarm occurs. See the diagram below.
Table 5-113 Link Fault PropagationE-Line Mode

Activated by Alarm
WAN1 Alarm
LAN1 Alarm
Yes
Yes
5.43.4.10 Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup

The Unit Menu path for Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setup is as follows:
262
Table 5-114 Inter-Frame Gap (IFG) Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
LAN4
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
80, 88, 96
88
88
88
88
Note
Input your settings. Press the Enter key.

Unit TG3 -GE-SW
=== Inter-Frame Gap(IFG) Setup ===
11:03:03 09/03/2009

Port
IFG (Bit Times)
------
---------------
LAN1
88
LAN2
88
LAN3
88
LAN4
88

The Unit Menu path for Performance Setup/Clear is as follows:
Then press one of the following:
The Unit Menu path for Clear Performance Data is as follows:
A prompt will ask if you want to clear the performance data. Press Y for Yes or N for No.
Unit TG3 FE
=== Performance Setup/Clear ===
10:20:55 03/24/2008

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu or enter a command >>
263

The Unit Menu path for Performance Threshold Setup is as follows:
The Performance threshold Cross Alarm Setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to
move the cursor to the various fields. Then use the Tab key to scroll in your settings. Press
the Enter key.
Unit TG3 FE
=== Perf. Threshold Cross Alarm Setup ===10:21:34 03/24/2008
Monitor Point
HP-BIP(B3)
HP-REI
LP-BIP(V5)
LP-REI(V5)
LP-BIP(B3)
LP-REI(B3)
En/Dis
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
severity
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
MINR
Threshold
02400
02400
00600
00600
02400
19200
Table 5-115 Performance Threshold Setting Options

Monitor
Point
EN/DIS
Settings
EN/DIS
Default
Severity
Settings
Severity
Default
Threshold
Settings
Threshold
Default
HP-BIP(B3)
HP-REI
LP-BIP(V5)
LP-REI(V5
LP-BIP(B3)
LP-REI(B3)
EN
DIS
EN
INFO
MINR
MAJR
CRIT
INFO
1~99999
02400
02400
00600
00600
02400
19200
5.43.6 Loopback Test

The Unit Menu path for Loopback Test is as follows:
L > Loopback Test
The Loopback Test setup screen will appear. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
Unit TG2 -FE
=== Loopback Test ===
WAN#1(FE)
WAN#2(FE)
WAN#3(FE)
WAN#4(FE)
:
:
:
:
*OFF
*OFF
*OFF
*OFF
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
264
09:51:30 08/28/2009
Table 5-116 Loopback Test Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
WAN#1 (FE)
WAN#2 (FE)
WAN#3 (FE)
WAN#4 (FE)
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
TO-OPTICAL-LINE
Notes

The Unit Menu path for SNCP User Command is as follows:
The following SNCP User Command screen will appear. Input your settings. Press the Enter
key.
Unit TG2 -FE
09:59:21 08/28/2009
(VCG) WAN# :
Chan#
:
Command
:
1_
01
NONE
Note :
FS = Force Switch
MS = Manual Switch
Table 5-117 LoopbackTest Setting Options

Field
Settings
Default Setting
(VCG) WAN#
Chan#
Command
Range is 1 to 4
Range is 1 to 64
CLEAR, Lock-out,
FS-WA, MS-WA, FSEA, MS-EA
1
01
CLEAR
5.43.8 Unit Load Default and Reset

The Unit Menu path for Unit Load Default and Reset is as follows:
Press W. The following prompt will appear. Press Y for Yes
Reset - are you sure ? [Y/N]
Key in your password. Press the Enter key.

>>Password:
265
Notes
CHAPTER 6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
6 SDH/SONET FEATURES
6.1
Introduction
SONET and SDH use different terms to describe the three layers. SONET uses the terms Section, Line,
and Path. SONET terminology is illustrated in Figure 6-1, below.
SONET
Multiplexer
SONET SONET
Regenerator
Section
SONET
SONET
Cross
Connect
SONET
Multiplexer
Section
Line
Line
Path
Figure 6-1 SONET Layer Terminology

SDH uses the terms Regenerator Section, Multiplex Section and Path. SDH terminology is illustrated in
Figure 6-2, below.
Figure 6-2 SDH Layer Terminology
266
6.2
Multiplexing structure and Mapping modes
The O9400S complies with the basic multiplexing principles outlined in ITU-T G.707 clause 6
and ETSI EN 300147 clause 4. The O9400S supports the multiplexing structure outlined in
Figure 6-1. This is a subset of the possible multiplexing structures defined in ITU-T G.707
clause 6 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 4.
Figure 6-3 Multiplexing/Mapping Structure adapted from ITU-T G.707/Y.1322

The O9400S complies with the multiplexing methods outlined in ITU-T G.707 clause 7 and
ETSI EN 300 147 clause 5 for the supported multiplexing structures.
6.2.1
Mapping of Tributaries into VC-n
6.2.1.1 Asynchronous mapping of 44 736 kbps

The O9400S supports asynchronous mapping of 44 736 Kbps signal into a VC-3 container
as shown in Figure 6-2, below. The mapping is in accordance to ITU-T G.707 clause
10.1.2.1 and ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 8.
Figure 6-4 Asynchronous Mapping of 44 736 kbps Tributary into VC-3
267
6.2.1.2 Asynchronous mapping of 34 368 kbps

The O9400S supports asynchronous mapping of 34 368 kbps signal into a VC-3
container as shown in Figure 6-3, below. The mapping is in accordance to ITU-T G.707
clause 10.1.2.2 and ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 8
Figure 6-5 Asynchronous Mapping of 34 368 kbps Tributary into VC-3
6.2.1.3 Asynchronous mapping of 2048kbps

The O9400S supports Asynchronous mapping of 2048kbps signal into a VC-12 container as
shown in Figure 6-4. The mapping is in accordance to ITU-T G.707 clause 10.1.4.1 and
ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 8.
Figure 6-6 Asynchronous Mapping of 2048kbps into VC-12
268
6.2.1.4 Mapping of GFP Frames

The O9400S supports the generic framing procedure (GFP) to encapsulate variable length
payload of various client signals for subsequent transport over SDH networks as defined in
ITU-T G.707. The O9400S supports mapping of a GFP frame stream into a Container-n
(n=12,3,4 or12/3/4-Xv) as shown in Figure 6-5, below. The mapping is in accordance to
ITU-T G.707 clause 10.6.
Figure 6-7 Mapping of GFP Frames into C-n
6.2.1.5 Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232

The O9400S provides a proprietary mapping scheme for mapping of RS232 encapsulated
Ethernet frames traffic into C-12 containers. The proprietary mapping scheme used to map
the data into a C-12 container is described in Figure 6-6, below.
Figure 6-8 Loop Proprietary Mapping of RS232
269

6.2.1.6
TM-N Physical layer
The O9400S offers the following physical interfaces:

Optical STM-1 interfaces, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2
Optical STM-4 interfaces, S4.1, L4.1, L4.2
The O9400S implements the supported Physical layer functions in accordance to ITU-T
G.783 clause 9.
6.2.1.7
STM-N Regenerator and Multiplex Section layer
The O9400S implements the STM-N (n=1,4) Regenerator and Multiplex Section layer
functions in accordance to ITU-T G.783 clause 10 and 11.
SOH implementation
The O9400S complies with the SOH implementation methods outlined in ITU-T G.707
clause 9 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 7. The assignment of the STM-n SOH is outlined in
Figure 6-7, below.
Figure 6-9 STM-n Section Overhead (SOH)
6.2.1.8 VC-n/m Path layer

The O9400S offers the support of the following payloads:
VC-4
VC-4-Xv
VC-3
VC-3-Xv
VC-12
VC-12-Xv
VC-11
The O9400S implements the supported Path layer functions in accordance to ITU-T
G.783 clause 12 for VC-n, where n=4-X, 4, 3-X, 3.
270
The O9400S implements the supported Path layer functions in accordance to ITU-T
G.783 clause 13 for VC-m, where m=12-X, 12. 11
6.2.1.9
VC4-Xc/VC-4/VC-3 POH Implementation
The O9400S complies with the POH implementation methods outlined in ITU-T G.707
clause 9 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 7. The assignment of the VC-4 POH is outlined in
Figure 6-8, below.
The O9400S supports all the VC-4/VC-3 POH bytes as described in ITU-T G.707 Clause
9.3.1, with the following exceptions:
G1 bit 6 and 7 Enhanced RDI, Clause 9.3.1.4 is not supported
Path user channels F2 and F3, Clause 9.3.1.5 are not supported
K3 byte, Clause 9.3.1.7, 9.3.1.9-10 is not supported
Network operator byte N1, Clause 9.3.1.8 is not supported
Figure 6-10 VC-4 POH
271
6.2.1.10 VC-2/VC-1 POH Implementation

The O9400S complies with the POH implementation methods outlined in ITU-T G.707 clause
9 and ETSI EN 300 147 clause 7. The assignment of the VC-12 POH is outlined in Figure 6-9,
below.
Figure 6-11 VC-12 POH

The O9400S supports all the VC-2/VC-1 POH bytes as described in ITU-T G.707 Clause
9.3.1, with the following exceptions:
Network operator byte N2, Clause 9.3.2.3 is not supported
K4 byte (b3-b8), clause 9.3.2.6-8 is not supported
6.2.2
Cross-connect
The O9400S implements a full non-blocking STM-1/4 cross connect with VC11, VC12, VC-3
and VC-4 granularity.
The following cross connect types are supported:
Bi-directional connections on all levels
Uni-directional connections on all levels
6.2.3
Concatenation schemes
6.2.3.1
Virtual concatenation
The O9400S supports virtual concatenation, the following VC-n-Xv are supported:
VC-12-Xv
VC-3-Xv
VC-4-Xv
The O9400S implements the supported VC-4-Xv and VC-3-Xv functionality in accordance
to ITU-T G.707 clause 11.2 and ETSI EN 300 147 Clause 9.
The O9400S implements the supported VC-12-Xv functionality in accordance to ITU-T G.707
clause 11.4 and ETSI EN 300147 Clause 9. Virtual concatenation is supported in conjunction
with EOS mapping and is module dependent.
272

6.2.4
Protection
The O9400S offers the following different protection schemes:
MSP 1+1 protection
SNC protection
MSP 1+1
Protection
SNC
Protection
SDH
Figure 6-12 Protection schemes for O9400S
6.2.4.1
MSP 1+1 linear
The O9400S offers Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) 1+1 linear on all optical STM-N
interfaces.
The following rules apply for the MSP 1+1 protection:
Protection can only be enabled between two ports of the same STM-N type
The MSP 1+1 functionality is in accordance with ITU-T G.841, clause 7.1. The following
parameters are configurable on an MSP object:
Enabled/disabled
Mode, unidirectional or bi-directional
Operation Type, revertive or non-revertive
The protocol used for K1 and K2 (b1-b5) is defined in ITU-T G.841, clause 7.1.4.5.1. The
protocol used is 1+1 bi-directional switching compatible with 1:n bi-directional switching.
6.2.4.2
SNC Protection
Two types of SNC protection are supported: SNC/I (Sub Network Connection protection with
Inherent monitoring) and SNC/N (Sub Network Connection protection with non-intrusive
monitoring). SNC is supported for the following objects:
VC-11
VC-12
VC-3
273

VC-4
The SNCP functionality is in accordance with ITU-T G.841 Clause 8. The following
parameters are configurable on an SNCP object:
Enabled/disabled
Operation Type, revertive or non-revertive
The Application architecture supported is 1+1 unidirectional switching, according to
ITU-T G.841 clause 8.3.2. The switch initiation criteria are implemented as described
in ITU-T G.841 clause 8.4. The protection algorithm is implemented according to ITUT G.841 clause 8.6.
SNC Protected Uni-directional Cross-connection Limitations
When one direction of a path forms part of an SNC protected uni- directional cross connection,
the other direction can not form part of a different SNC protected uni-directional crossconnection. But the two directions can form part of two different uni-directional un-protected
cross connections. This applies to uni-directional cross-connections on all path layers.
6.2.5
Performance Monitoring
In the subsequent chapters the following definition are used, according to G.826:
Errored second (ES): A one second period with one or more errored blocks or at
least one defect.
Severely errored second (SES): A one second period which contains >=
30% errored blocks or at least one defect
Background block error (BBE): An errored block not occurring as a part of an SES
Unavailable seconds (UAS): A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of ten
consecutive SES events. These ten seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time.
A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events.
These ten seconds are considered to be part of available time. UAS is the number of
second of unavailable time.
6.2.5.1
Regenerator and multiplex section performance monitoring
The O9400S offers full performance monitoring on regenerator and multiplex sections
according to G.829.
The following parameters are calculated:
ES
SES
BBE
UAS
For the regenerator section near end data are presented, for the multiplex section both
near end and far end data are presented.
The available time periods are:
15 minutes
24 hours
The system presents current data and historical data, the number of time periods are:
96x15 minute
7x24 hours
The O9400S calculates excessive error and degrade signal defects assuming Poisson
distribution of errors, according to ITU-T G.826.
274

The excessive error defect (dEXC) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-5, and be cleared if the equivalent BER is better than 10E-6, according to
ITU-T G.806.
The degraded signal defect (dDEG) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-X, where x=6, 7, 8 or 9. The dDEG is cleared if the equivalent BER is
better than 10E-(X+1), according to ITU-T G.806 .The threshold is individual configurable
for the regenerator and multiplex section, from 10E-6 to 10E-9.
6.2.5.2
Path performance monitoring
The O9400S offers full performance monitoring on the SDH path level according to G.828,
the following objects are supported:
VC-11
VC-12
VC-3
VC-4
The following parameters are calculated:
ES
SES
BBE
UAS
Both near end and far end data are presented. The available time periods are:
15 minutes
24 hours
The system presents current data and historical data, the number of time periods are:
96x15 minute
7x24 hours
The O9400S calculates excessive error and degrade signal defects assuming Poisson
distribution of errors, according to ITU-T G.826.
The excessive error defect (dEXC) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-5, and be cleared if the equivalent BER is better than 10E-6, according to
ITU-T G.806.
The degraded signal defect (dDEG) is detected if the equivalent BER exceeds a pre-set
threshold of 10E-X, where x=6, 7, 8 or 9. The dDEG is cleared if the equivalent BER is
better than 10E-(X+1), according to ITU-T G.806 .The threshold is individual configurable
for the different objects, from 10E-6 to 10E-9.
6.2.5.3 Synchronization
The O9400S offers synchronization from a range of different interfaces.
In addition to the module interfaces it is possible to synchronize from a 2MHz
synchronization input source. The interface is according to ITU-T G.703. The O9400S also
offers a synchronization output port, according to ITU-T G703.
The different interfaces allowed for synchronization are listed below.
Synchronization sources:
E1/T1 interface
E3/T3 interface
STM-1/4
2MHz sync input
2Mbps
1.5Mbps
275

Through the SETS (Synchronous Equipment Timing Source), the synchronization signals
are distributed to the equipment ports.
The O9400S offers a list of 4 possible synchronization sources for the T0, selection of the
sync source is based upon the quality level.
The O9400S supports SSM messaging on the STM-N interfaces, this is not supported on
the E1/T1/E3/T3 interface.
276
6.3
PDH Features
6.3.1 E1 features
6.3.1.1 General information
O9400S supports a number of E1 interfaces that are mapped into SDH VC-12 containers.
Different E1 tributary modules are available supporting up to 8 or 16 E1 channels interface.
6.2.1.2
Transparent Leased Line
The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 2048
kbps with no restriction on the binary content.
The service is symmetrical in both directions and only supports point-to- point connections.
The service is specified in EN 300 247 and the network interface is specified in EN 300 418.
An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted toward the network if loss of signal (LOS) is
detected from the customer.
AIS is also inserted towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from
the networks.
6.3.2
E3/T3 Features
6.3.2.1 General information

The O9400S supports a number of E3/T3 interfaces that are mapped into SDH VC-3
containers.
E3/T3 tributary module supports 3 channel E3/T3 interface.
The E3/T3 interface provides a number of different services as shown below:
E3 Transparent leased line
T3 Transparent leased line
It is possible to configure the E3/T3 interfaces individually to support the different services.
6.3.2.2 E3 transparent leased line
The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 34.368
Mbps with no restriction on the binary content. The service is symmetrical in both directions
and only supports point-to-point connections. An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted
toward the network if loss of signal (LOS) is detected from the customer. AIS is also
inserted towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from the networks.
6.3.2.3 T3 transparent leased line
The transparent or unstructured leased line service delivers a full digital bit rate of 44.736
Mbps with no restriction on the binary content. The service is symmetrical in both directions
and only supports point-to-point connection. An alarm indication signal (AIS) is inserted
toward the network if loss of signal (LOS) is detected from the customer. AIS is also
inserted towards the customer if LOS or other major alarms are detected from the networks.
6.3.3 Loop-back
Two types of Loop-back are supported for the interface; Customer Loop (LL3) and Network
Loop (LL2).
277
Loop-O9400-S
Optical
To Optical Line
To Tributary Line
To Optical Line
To E1/T1 Line
E1/T1 or
E3/T3
Figure 6-13 O9400S Loopback Diagram

A customer Loop takes the incoming customer traffic and sends it back towards the customer.
Note that AIS is sent towards the network.
A network Loop takes the incoming traffic from the network and sends it back towards
the network. Note that in this case AIS is sent towards the customer.
The Loops can be activated from the O9400S terminal or from the management system.
278
6.4
Management Features
This section presents the O9400S interfaces, and communication functions used for
management communications.
6.4.1 Introduction
In this context the term "management is used to denote the network that transports
management information between a management station and the NE. The O9400S
management solution is based on SNMP over IP.
6.4.2
Management Interfaces
The management traffic pertinent to the O9400S is IP carrying SNMP, TELNET and TFTP
application protocols. In order to support management connectivity in any possible topology
and application, the O9400S supports management traffic on the following interfaces:
6.4.2.1
Management port
The O9400S has a dedicated Ethernet port for management. It can be used for connecting to
a separate external management network. The management port can be turned off to avoid
unauthorized local access. The management port cannot be a member of a VLAN.
6.4.2.2
DCC channels
The SDH architecture defines data communication channels (DCC) for transport of
management traffic in the regenerator section (DCCR - 192 kbit/s) and in the multiplexer
section (DCCM - 576 kbit/s).
Each SDH-module may terminate up to 3 DCCR (D1-D3) and/or 4 DCCM (D4-D12) channels,
i.e. an absolute upper limitation on the number of active DCC-channels is 12. For one SDHport, both DCC channels may be active simultaneously. Activation/deactivation of DCC
channels are configurable.
6.4.2.3
Device
Table 6-1 O9400S Device (System) Alarms
O9400S Device Alarms
Alarm Type
Default Severity
Description
Alarm Cut Off
Informative
Cut off alarm
Power Loss
Major
Power 1 or Power 2 loss
TS Sync Loss
Minor
Valid clock loss
SNCP Switch
Major
SNCP protection switch
MSP Switch
Major
MSP protection switch
Login/Logout
FOM Equip/Uneq
SFP Tx Fail
SFP Rx Fail
SFP Temperature
Informative
Informative
Informative
Informative
Informative
Log in/out
FOM equipped/unequipped
SFP module transmit failure
SFP module receive failure
SFP module overheating
279

6.4.2.4
SDH
Table 6-2 SDH Alarms
SDH Alarms
Alarm Id
Default Severity
Description
LOS
Critical
Loss Of Signal
LOF
Critical
Loss Of Frame
RS-TIM
Minor
Trace Identifier Mismatch
B1 UAS
Minor
Unavailable Seconds triggered by B1-BIP
MS-SF
Minor
Signal Failure
MS-SD
Minor
Signal Degrade
MS-AIS
Major
Alarm Indication Signal
MS-RDI
Minor
Remote Defect Indication
B2 UAS
Minor
MS-REI UAS
Minor
Unavailable Seconds triggered by MS-REI
AU-AIS
Major
AU-LOP
Major
Loss Of Pointer
HP-SF
Minor
Signal Failure
HP-SD
Minor
Signal Degrade
HP-TIM
Minor
HP-RDI-S
Minor
Remote Server Defect Indication
HP-RDI-C
Minor
Remote Connectivity Defect Indication
HP-RDI-P
Minor
Remote Payload Defect Indication
LOM
Major
Loss of Multiframe
HP-UNEQ
Minor
Unequipped
HP-PLM
Minor
Payload Label Mismatch
HP-B3-BIP UAS
Minor
HP-REI-BIP UAS
Minor
Unavailable Seconds triggered by HP-REI
TU-AIS
Major
TU-LOP
Major
Loss Of Pointer
LP-SF
Minor
Signal Failure
LP-SD
Minor
Signal Degrade
LP-TIM
Minor
LP-RDI-S
Minor
LP-RDI-C
Minor
LP-RDI-P
Minor
LP-UNEQ
Minor
Unequipped
LP-PLM
Minor
Payload Label Mismatch
LP-AIS
Minor
Alarm Indication
LP-V5-BIP UAS
Minor
Unavailable Seconds triggered by V5-BIP
LP-V5-REI-BIP
UAS
Minor
Unavailable Seconds triggered by LP-V5-REI
280

6.4.2.5
Tributary Module
Table 6-3 Miscellaneous Alarms
Miscellaneous Alarms
Alarm Id
Default Severity
Description
E1/T1 Module
TU-AIS
Major
TU-LOP
Major
Loss Of Pointer
LP-SF
Major
Signal Failure
LP-SD
Major
Signal Degrade
LP-TIM
Major
LP-RDI-S
Major
LP-RDI-C
Major
LP-RDI-P
Major
LP-UNEQ
Major
Unequipped
LP-PLM
Major
Payload Mismatch
LP-V5-BIP UAS
Major
Unavailable Seconds triggered by V5-BIP
LP-V5-REI UAS Major
Unavailable Seconds triggered by LP-REI-BIP
LOS
Major
Loss Of Signal
AIS
Major
UAS
Major
Unavailable Second
RAI
Major
Remote Alarm Indication
Parameters associated with an alarm entry as stored in the alarm log on the network
element, are detailed in Table 6-5, below.
Table 6-4 Alarm Parameters

Parameters
Alarm Des String
Alarm Time Stamp
Alarm Tributary Unit
Alarm Tributary
Module Type
Alarm Port Num
Alarm Type
Alarm Severity
Alarm Status
Alarm severity:
Alarm Parameters
Descriptions
A string object to give a text description of alarm trap. The alarm description
string of free style. But its strongly recommended to use the same order of
the format above.
A string object to describe the time & date of the alarm. The time stamp format
shall be of hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY.
An integer object to describe Unit number.
e.g. Unit-1(1), Unit-2(2)
An integer object to describe card/module types
e.g. E1(1), E3(2), T1(3).
An integer object to describe Port Number
e.g. port-1(1), port-2(2),....
An integer object to describe alarm types. The alarm type shall be as generic
as possible to gain maximum reuse by all types of interface. For example, the
alarm type for E1-LOS shall defined as LOS
e.g. LOS(1), LOF(2), Card_OUT, Card_IN, .....
An integer object to describe alarm severity. (e.g. critical, major, minor,
informative ).
An integer object to describe alarm Status (e.g. active, cleared, ABS (Active
but suppressed))
It is possible for the operator to assign an alarm severity for

each combination of Object Type + Alarm Id. The severity
281

levels are INFORM, MINOR, MAJOR and CRITICAL. Default
values are assigned automatically.
Alarm presentation:
It is possible to view a list of all current alarms and a log of

alarm events. The size of the log of alarm events is 5000.
The graphical representation of managed objects reflects the
alarm state (severity level) by use of an appropriate colour.
Alarm filtering:
Alarms are suppressed if the object subject to alarm is

disabled (by setting its administrative state down). Alarm
disabling applies to device, module and port objects.
Disabling an object also applies to its subordinate objects.
For the SDH objects AU-4, VC-4, TU-3, VC-3, TU-11/12
and VC-11/12, the administrator is able to configure an
alarm mask for each object type. This alarm mask applies
as a general filter to all SDH objects of the corresponding
type.
For E1 and E3 ports, the administrator is able to
configure an alarm mask for each port instance.
Alarm suppression:
If an alarm is active, it may also suppress other (lower-order)

alarms. How active alarms may suppress other (lower-order)
alarms, are defined by the tables below.
282
Table 6-5 Alarm Suppression Table for SDH Related Items

Note: Alarm suppression (as stated in Table 4-6, below) is only performed for alarms
confined to one side of the DXC. Alarm suppression is not provided across the DXC.
Object Type (class)
SPI
LOS
RS
MS
Au-4
VC-4
TU-3
TU11/12
VC-3
VC11/12
PDH
(RX)
Suppression of other alarms?

Yes, all with higher
LOF
Yes, all with higher numbers
TIM
No
AIS
RDI
No
LOP
AIS
UNEQ
TIM
No
RDI
No
PLM
No
AIS
LOM
LOP
AIS
UNEQ
TIM
No
RDI
No
PLM
No
Table 6-6 Alarm Suppression Table for PDH (tributary) Alarms

Alarm Suppression Table for PDH (tributary) Alarms
Alarm ID
Suppress alarms with higher numbers
LOS
AIS
UAS
RAI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
283
Line LOS
Line LOF
Line SF
Line SD
MS-AIS
RS-TIM
B1-UAS
B2-UAS
AU-LOP
AU-AIS
HP-SF
HP-SD
HP-PLM
HP-UNEQ
HP-LOM
HP-TIM
HP-AIS
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-SF
LP-SD
LP-PLM
LP-UNEQ
LP-TIM
LP-AIS
Figure 6-14 Alarm Suppression Sequence
284
V5-UAS
B3-UAS
6.5
Configuration Management
6.5.1 Backup and Restoration of Configuration Data

It is possible to back-up the configuration data of an O9400S device. It is also possible to
reload the configuration from the backup. The back-up media is in a central repository.
6.5.2
Software download
It is possible to download new software and FPGA code to the O9400S device itself and to
modules/external modules. For all software and FPGA code items there are capacity of
storing two different versions in the device, and switchover from one version to the other
one is possible by operator command.
6.5.3 Feature management
The embedded software in the O9400S is capable of supporting all features (licensed or
not licensed) finalised at the time of the release. To activate a specific feature, the device
checks whether it has the corresponding licensed right to do it. Licenses can be ordered
individually for each available functionality (OSI, HW Routing). This will be a unique file for
each NE, generated based on a software key bound to the serial number of each O9400S
device, and they are stored internally in each O9400S.
6.5.4 Device reset
It is possible to reset (reboot) the device with or without resetting the current configuration.
Reboot have minimal impact on traffic processing.
The period of time from the moment you have triggered a restart to the time that the device is
up and running is dependent on equipped modules and SW configuration of the device.
285
CHAPTER 7 ETHERNET APPENDIX
7 ETHERNET APPENDIX
7.1
Flow control
In full duplex mode, the MAC transmitter sends flow control frames when necessary. The
MAC receiver interprets and processes incoming flow control frames. The Flow Control
Frame Received statistics counter is incremented whenever a flow control frame is received.
By default, flow control is symmetric when the port is operating in full duplex mode. This
means that when flow control is enabled, the MAC transmitter sends flow control frames and
the MAC receiver interprets and processes incoming flow control frames. The device also
provides the option to program each port to work in asymmetric mode. When a port is in
asymmetric flow control mode and flow control is enabled, the MAC transmitter does not send
flow control frames but the MAC receiver interprets and processes flow control frames.
7.2
Trunk
A port group (i.e., trunk or link aggregate) can include up to 8 physical ports, all of the ports in
a group are in the same device. There are four (4) trunk groups total.
If a VLAN includes the leader port in a trunk group, all the ports in that trunk group will be in
the same VLAN member map like the leader port in that trunk.(This will be done internally by
switch. User do not need to modify the port association table configuration.)
7.3
Quality of Service (QoS)
With strict priority and/or WFQ transmission scheduling, and WRED dropping schemes, the
ethernet switch provides powerful QoS functions for various multimedia and mission-critical
applications. Each port provides 4 transmission priorities and 2 levels of dropping precedence.
Each packet is assigned a transmission priority and dropping precedence that may be based
on:
-Ingress port
-IEEE 802.1p priority field in a VLAN tagged frame
-TOS field in an IP frame
-UDP/TCP logical port fields in a L4 frame
We assume that the network manager can recognize applications, such as voice, video, file
transfer, or web or email traffic, and can evaluate their relative time-sensitivity or importance.
The network manager can then group the applications into classes, which will determine
which frames have priority for transmission or which frames are more likely to be dropped
when resources run low.
The purpose of this section is to explain the basic QoS features and guide the user into
programming the QoS registers of the switch.
286
Fixed port priority?
Yes
Use default port setting
No
TOS precedence
over VLAN?
Yes
No
Yes
VLAN tag present?
No
Logical port match?
No
Use TOS
Yes
Use VLAN priority
Use logical port
Figure 7-1 Rule for Determining Transmission Class

7.3.1 Internal Priority Setup (Class of Service)
Each ingress port can be programmed to use one of the following options to map the
incoming packets to assign a traffic class to each incoming packet:
1
Using a fixed priority defined for that ingress port
2
Using the IEEE 802.1p priority defined in the VLAN tag
3
Using bits [7:5] or [4:2] of the TOS field in the IP header
4
Using TCP/UDP port configuration
7.3.1.1
Using Fixed Priority
In fixed priority mode, a frame's class is associated with its ingress port only, and not with
anything contained in the frame itself. For example, the user can assign all frames originating
from port 15 to traffic class 2.
The values programmed here also serve as default priority if the packet is not an IP frame
and contains no VLAN tag. Therefore, even if fixed port-based priority has been disabled,
the register settings here may play an important role.
7.3.1.2
Using the Priority Defined in the VLAN Tag
For each ingress port, the switch provides the option of using information in the packet header
to assign a priority, instead of assigning a fixed priority to all frames. Additionally, the user
may decide whether the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the VLAN tag or the TOS field of the IP
header is preferred for priority assignment.
The 3 bits of VLAN tag priority are translated using switch registers. These registers allow the
user to map each of the eight VLAN tag priorities to an internal 3-bit priority used by the
switch for transmission scheduling and buffer management. Note that the translated priority is
only used internally by the switch; the VLAN field in the outgoing packet is, of course,
unchanged.
7.3.1.3
Distrusted Port
If a previous stage in the network is sending traffic with an inappropriate VLAN tag priority or
with a rate higher than the bandwidth allocated for that traffic priority, then the port receiving
the data may be considered a "distrusted" public access port. The switch provides the user
with the option of marking any port distrusted. When a port has been marked distrusted, a
packets VLAN tag priority field is automatically replaced with a predefined value - most
typically, 0. The outgoing packet carries the new VLAN tag priority. The internal transmission
priority for this packet may also be based on the new value, if VLAN tag-based priority
287

assignment has been enabled.
Note that this feature only applies when the switch is configured in tag-based VLAN mode.
7.3.1.4
Using the Priority Defined in the TOS Field of the IP Header
The switch can also assign packet priority using the type of service (TOS) field in the IP
header. First, the user must disable fixed port-based priority. Second, the user must choose
the TOS field instead of the VLAN tag as the means of detraining priority. Third, the user must
decide which 3 bits in the TOS byte will be used to extract the packet priority.
7.3.2
Layer 4 TCP/UDP Port Configure(TCP/UDP Port Access Control)
Another way in which the switch allows priority to be assigned to a packet is by using the
source and destination port fields in the Layer 4 (TCP or UDP) header. If fixed port-based
priority has been disabled, and an incoming packet contains an L4 header with either the
source or destination TCP/UDP port field matching a programmed value, then the packet will
be assigned a priority that has been programmed for that logical port. Note that this is not
applicable for the packets with double vlan tagging.
Well-known network services with logical port numbers below 1024 are defined in Assigned
Numbers RFC. The switch supports eight of these well-known ports, as well as eight
additional user-defined logical ports and one user-defined range.
7.3.2.1
Well Known Ports
The eight well known ports supported by the switch are as follows:
Table 7-1 Well-known Port Number versus Service Type
Well-known Port Number
Service Type
23
Telnet
512
Exec (Remote process

execution)
6000
Windows
443
HTTPS
111
SUN rpc (Remote

procedure call)
22555
IP phone call setup
22
SSH
554
RTSP
The priority associated with each of the eight well-known ports can be programmed. The
priority assignment for each well-known port can be individually enable or disable.
7.3.2.2
User Defined Logical Ports
The switch also allows the user to configure eight additional logical ports for use in packet
priority assignment. If either the source or destination TCP/UDP logical port number in the
packet header matches a programmed value, then a predefined priority will be assigned to
the packet. Also the user can enable or disable each of the eight configurable logical ports.
288

7.3.2.3
User Defined Logical Port Range
The switch also permits the user to define one logical port range - an interval with a defined
lower and upper bound. Packets that contain a source or destination L4 logical port in this
range will be assigned a priority that has been associated with this range.
Note that the user defined logical range does not include the upper and lower limits
themselves. To disable priority assignment based on logical port range, set the value in the
upper limit to be less than or equal to the value in the lower limit.
7.3.3
Transmission Queues
We have seen the many ways in which a transmission priority can be assigned to a packet in
the switch. Once a priority has been assigned, it is used to determine into which transmission
queue (or simply queue) the packet will be inserted prior to transmission. In the switch, each
port has four queues.
7.3.4
Transmission Scheduling Setup
Packets are selected for transmission from among the queues during a process called
transmission scheduling. Only a packet at the head-of-line of one of the queues is eligible to
be scheduled for transmission to the corresponding port. If more than one of the queues for a
port contains a packet, then a transmission scheduling algorithm determines which packet
should be transmitted first. The switch supports two basic transmission scheduling algorithms:
strict priority (SP) and weighted fair queuing (WFQ).
7.3.5
Strict Priority (SP)
When all queues for a port use the SP algorithm, then queue 3 is considered "higher priority"
than queue 2; queue 2 is considered "higher priority" than queue 1; and so on. Queue 0 has
the lowest priority. Whenever a frame is scheduled, it is always selected from the highest
priority queue that contains a packet. For example, if only queues 3, 2, and 1 contain packets,
then the head-of-line entry in queue 3 will be scheduled next. If, in the same example, queue
3 were to contain five packets, then all five packets would be transmitted before any of the
packets in queues 2 or 1. The SP algorithm guarantees minimum latency for the traffic
assigned to the highest priority queues. It is important that strict priority traffic be either
policed or implicitly bounded, so as to keep from harming other traffic classes.
7.3.5.1
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ)
When all queues for a port use the WFQ algorithm, then no queue receives higher or lower
priority than any other. Instead, each queue receives a configured minimum percentage of the
port bandwidth, and the switch computes the correct sequence of packet transmissions
needed to achieve this bandwidth allocation for each queue. When the port is congested
with a lot of traffic in all queues, then packets will be transmitted in an order that adheres to
the programmed bandwidth ratio among traffic classes. When the port is not congested, then
excess bandwidth that is, bandwidth unused by one or more idle traffic classes - will be
temporarily redistributed to those traffic classes for packets are queued.
Minimum bandwidth assignments to each of the queues for a port are configured using
weights. For example, on a 10/100 port, to partition the bandwidth by giving 25 Mbps to class
3, 50 Mbps to class 2, 17 Mbps to class 1, and 8 Mbps to class 0, then the weights must be
set as follows: W3 =25; W2=50; W1=17; and W0=8. The resulting ratio W3:W2:W1:W0 =
25:50:17:8 matches the desired bandwidth allocation to the four queues.
In the switch, the user may also configure some of the queues to use the SP algorithm, with
other queues using WFQ. In this case, all queues that are configured as SP have higher
priority than any of the queues using WFQ. For example, if queues 3 and 2 are configured as
SP and queues 1 and 0 are configured as WFQ, then packets will be scheduled with highest
priority from queue 3, and then from queue 2. But if none of these queues contain any
packets, then the WFQ algorithm is used to select a packet from among queues 0 and 1.
In the previous example, the sum of the weights distributed to queues 0 and 1 can still be 100.
However, one should note that if there is a large quantity of traffic in the strict priority queues,
then the WFQ-scheduled queues will not necessarily receive the bandwidth they were
allocated. Therefore, for optimal results, we recommend that if SP is mixed with WFQ, then
289

the SP queues should support only very light traffic.
7.3.6
Drop Precedence
In the switch, every packet is assigned a 1-bit drop precedence in addition to its transmission
priority. Two levels of drop precedence are provided: high and low. When traffic conditions
necessitate packet dropping, frames that are identified as high drop precedence are more
likely to be dropped than frames that are identified as low drop precedence.
A packet dropping discipline is an unfortunate but necessary part of any network node. Traffic
congestion always results in a packet backlog, which, if the congestion lasts long enough,
eventually fills up a switch's limited memory. Because of buffer management and traffic
prioritization mechanisms in the switch, well-behaved users or flows rarely lose any packets,
regardless of traffic conditions. But poorly behaved users or flows will encounter frame loss.
For example, if a 100 Mbps port sends traffic at full wire speed to a 10 Mbps port, packets will
rapidly accumulate in memory and will eventually result in packet loss. On the other hand,
short-term congestion - for example, a burst of a few hundred packets - may be stored inside
the packet memory with no data loss observed.
Because frame loss is unavoidable under some traffic conditions, the switch uses drop
precedence to selectively discard traffic that is least sensitive to loss. Of course, if discarding
such "high drop" frames is insufficient to relieve the congestion, then eventually some "low
drop" frames must also be discarded.
In addition to drop precedence, the switch additionally softens the impact of packet drop by
using Weighted Random Early Drop (WRED). If the switch were to simply wait until the
memory is full before dropping any packets, then certain traffic groups could unfairly receive
especially good or especially bad treatment, based only on minor, coincidental differences in
when their packets arrive. For example, consider a scenario in which ports A and B send
equal-length packets at full wire speed to port C. If the switch were to drop packets only when
its memory is full, then one can imagine that port A might drop 0% of its packets, and port B
would drop 100% of its packets, or vice versa - a completely unfair outcome.
A second consideration is that in higher layer protocols (such as TCP) that regulate the rate of
packet transmission by using feedback, a long period of missing acknowledgment messages
may cause excessive slowdown or loss of a session entirely. During a session, the TCP
protocol constantly adjusts the sender's rate of transmission based on acknowledgment
messages fed back from the receiver. As long as acknowledgment messages are received in
time, the sender will continually increase its rate of transmission, because it thinks the
receiver is "keeping up." But if the network device waits until the memory is full before
dropping packets, then at that time, packets will likely be dropped in bunches. As a result, the
TCP sender will observe a long period of no acknowledgments. The sender will
overcompensate with the "brake," and the session may be lost or excessively slowed.
The switch tackles these issues by using WRED, a packet dropping discipline that discards
packets even before the memory is full. The decision whether to discard a packet is made by
flipping a weighted coin. When memory availability falls below a first threshold, incoming
traffic is dropped with a configurable probability. When memory availability falls even lower, to
below a second threshold, traffic is dropped with a second (and higher) probability.
Furthermore, the switch differentiates between packets with high and low drop precedence by
applying different drop probabilities for each. The details of WRED in the switch are described
in the next section.
Note that if frame loss is unacceptable for a particular application, flow control may be
enabled at each ingress port independently. In this case, no packets from that port will be
dropped, although the rate of frame uptake may decrease.
7.3.6.1
Drop Precedence Setup
Each ingress port can be programmed to use one of the following options to assign a drop
precedence to each incoming packet:
- Using a fixed drop precedence defined for that port
- Using the IEEE 802.1p bits in the VLAN tag
- Using bits [7:5] or [4:2] of the TOS field in the IP header
- Using TCP/UDP port configuration
290

Note: See Section 7.3.1, Internal Priority Setup (Class of Service), as described in the section
on setting transmission priority.
Example: To use the 802.1p bits in the VLAN tag for determining a packet's drop precedence,
set Priority MODE to Tag/TOS and Packet Priority to Tag . Now suppose that an incoming,
VLAN-tagged packet has 802.1p field(tag priority) equal to 5. Therefore, the drop precedence
assigned to this packet will depend on Drop Precedence field in Vlan Tag Priority Setup. If
Drop Precedence is set to high-drop then the packet will be classified as high drop
precedence. If Drop Precedence is set to low-drop, then the packet will be classified as low
drop precedence. "High drop" packets are more likely to be discarded during periods of traffic
congestion.
7.3.6.2
Weighted Random Early Drop Settings
We have previously discussed the advantages of WRED for packet discard. The following
table summarizes the behavior of the WRED mechanism in the switch for congested
transmission queues.
Table 7-2 WRED Logic Behaviour
Number of Bytes
Number of Bytes
>
>
Low Threshold
High Threshold
(L1)
(L2)
High Drop
X%
100%
Low Drop
Y%
Z%
Every queue in the switch applies the mechanism illustrated in the table above. However, for
queue 0 (low priority queue), a flow control enabled source port will not trigger WRED, but will
instead trigger flow control when the queue has exceeded the L2 threshold.
When the amount of data awaiting transmission in any queue exceeds the first threshold, then
any incoming packet destined for this queue will be dropped with some probability (either X%
or Y%, depending on the packet's drop precedence). When the amount of data awaiting
transmission in that queue exceeds the second, higher threshold, then any incoming packet
destined for this queue will be dropped with a second, higher probability (either 100% or Z%,
depending on the packet's drop precedence).
Note that adjustment of the WRED thresholds must be performed with no traffic running
through the switch.
7.3.7
Rate Control
Rate control is for fast ethernet ports only.
7.3.7.1
Egress Rate Control
When the rate at which frames are queued for transmission exceeds the configured egress
rate for that port, the switch will only transmit enough data so as not to exceed the rate bound.
As a result, over time, frames may accumulate in the queues at a rate-regulated egress port.
If the situation persists, high queue occupancy may trigger flow control of certain source ports
and/or selective dropping of frames.
See Flow Control section for details on flow control. See Drop Precedence section for
details on frame dropping because of destination congestion.
291
7.3.7.2
Ingress Rate Control
When the rate at which frames arrive in the switch exceeds the configured ingress rate for
that port, the switch will only process enough data so as not to exceed the rate bound.
If flow control is enabled on the ingress port question, then flow control will be triggered when
the switch detects that too much traffic has arrived in too short a period of time. Normal
reception will resume when enough time has elapsed to return the port to its average data
rate.
If flow control is disabled on the ingress port, then incoming frames will be subject to
Weighted Random Early Drop(WRED) whenever the average rate for that port has been
exceeded. During WRED, frames are differentiated based upon their drop precedence.
During Level 1 dropping, only RB% of "high-drop" frames will be dropped. If Level 1 dropping
is insufficient to reduce the incoming rate sufficiently, then Level 2 dropping will be enforced;
in this level, all high-drop frames will be dropped, and RA% of "low-drop" frames will also be
dropped. If the traffic is so nonconformant that even Level 2 dropping is not enough, then
Level 3 dropping will be performed. In Level 3 dropping, all frames are dropped until the traffic
falls below the configured rate.
292
7.4
Ethernet Card Functions and Descriptions
The purpose of this section is to illustrate the structure and system mode of each card. For a
summary of the functions of each card, please refer to section 7.4.1. For illustrations and
explanations of the functions please refer to sections 7.4.2 to 7.4.5.
Users should be aware that a limitation exists between the optical side (SDH/SONET) and the
Ethernet side. For example, if you set up a cross-connect with 63 TU12 (126 Mbps) on an FE
WAN (100 Mbps), the maximum bandwidth will be 100 Mbps.
7.4.1
Card Functions
The card type and the functions are listed in the table below.
Table 7-3 O9400S Ethernet Card Function Table
Card Type
E-Line
4EoS1SW
4EoS6SW
4FE4NSW
1GE4NSW
7.4.2
7.4.2.1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
E-Lan
Yes
Yes
No
No
Card Functions
Port-Map
Yes
Yes
No
No
Port-Trunking
(Line Aggregation)
Yes
Yes
No
No
O9400S FE (4EoS1SW) Module

E- Line
E-Line Ethernet service is based on a point to point Ethernet virtual connection.

Note: All WAN ports are FE Ports.
293

Figure 7-2 FE (4EoS1SW) Module E-Line
7.4.2.2
E- Lan
E-Lan Ethernet service is based on the concept of Virtual LANs (VLANs). It supports IEEE
802.1Q specifations for tagging frames. This specification defines a way to coordinate
VLANs across multiple switches by inserting an additional 4-octet header (or tag) into a
frame after the source MAC address and before the frame type. Twelve bits of the tag are
used to define the VLAN ID.
Aggregate Line
VLAN
ID
Optical
WAN
2 ( 1 to 4095)
1
3 4
off on off off off on off off
WAN1~ WAN8
LAN
off
on
off
off
WAN Side
The Ethernet packet with

VID2 will go through via
LAN1 , WAN2 and WAN6
Mapper
SW
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE5
FE6
FE1
FE2
FE3
PHY
FEFE
FEFE
FE7
FE8
GbE4
4
GEGE
FEFE
LAN Side
1
LAN1 ~ LAN4
Figure 7-3 FE (4EoS1SW) Module E-Lan
294
7.4.2.3
Port Map
The Ethernet can be set up in either a one-way or a two-way direction. Any LAN and WAN
Port can be mapped to any LAN and WAN.
Note: In Port Map mode, packet forwarding decisions are based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port. The Port Map only governs the outgoing traffic (ie. it is unidirectional). Therefore, if yo wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk toeach other, you must
define the egress (outgoing) port for both ports.
Figure 7-4 FE (4EoS1SW) Module Port Map
295
7.4.2.4
Port Trunking (Line Aggregation)
Trunking can be set up at either the WAN side or the LAN side.
Aggregate Line
Optical
XC
Grouping
Mapper
SW
WAN Side
FE 1
FE 2
Grouping
FE
PHY
FE 3 FE 4 FE 5 FE 6
FE
FE 7 FE 8
FE
GE
FE
FE
FE
GE
Figure 7-5 FE (4EoS1SW) Module Port Trunking
296
LAN Side
7.4.3
O9400S FE (4EoS6SW) Module
E-Line Ethernet service is based on a point to point Ethernet virtual connection

7.4.3.1
E-Line
Note: There is one WAN Port. It is a GbE Port.
Aggregate Line
Optical
Mapper
WAN Side
SW
PHY
FE 1
X
FE
1
FE 2
FE 3
GE 4
FE
2
FE
3
GE
4
FE
FE
FE
GE
Figure 7-6 FE (4EoS6SW) Module E-Line
297
LAN Side
7.4.3.2
E-LAN
E-Lan Ethernet service is based on the concept of Virtual LANs (VLANs). It supports IEEE
802.1Q specifations for tagging frames. This specification defines a way to coordinate
VLANs across multiple switches by inserting an additional 4-octet header (or tag) into a
frame after the source MAC address and before the frame type. Twelve bits of the tag are
used to define the VLAN ID.
Figure 7-7 FE (4EoS6SW) Module E-LAN
298
7.4.3.3
Port MAP
The Ethernet can be set up in either a one-way or a two-way direction. Any LAN and WAN
Port can be mapped to any LAN and WAN.
Note: In Port Map mode, packet forwarding decisions are based on the destination MAC
address and its associated port. The Port Map only governs the outgoing traffic (ie. it is unidirectional). Therefore, if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you
must define the egress (outgoing) port for both ports.
Figure 7-8 FE (4EoS6SW) Module Port Map
299
7.4.3.4
Port Trunking (Line Aggregation)
Any Ethernet LAN and WAN can be mapped to several other LANs and WANs and then
grouped. Trunking can be set up at either the WAN side or theLAN side.
Figure 7-9 FE (4EoS6SW) Module Port Trunking
7.4.4
7.4.4.1
O9400S FE (4FE4NSW) Module

E-Line
Figure 7-10 FE (4FE4NSW) Module
300
7.4.5
7.4.5.1
O9400S (1GE4NSW) Module

E-Line
Figure 7-11 1GE4NSW Module
301
CHAPTER 8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX
8 ALARM TRAP APPENDIX

8.1
Local Alarm Trap
Trap definition -- trap MIB

loopO9400SLocalTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE loop-O9400SA
VARIABLES {alarmQueueString,
alarmQueueTimeStamp,
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueueCardModel,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3Type,
alarmQueueVC1xVTxType,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
alarmQueueSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap"
::= 3
8.2
Critical AlarmActive Trap
loopO9400SCriticalAlmActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
DESCRIPTION
"Critical alarm active trap"
::= 6
302
8.3
Critical Alarm Cleared Trap
loopO9400SCriticalAlmClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
DESCRIPTION
"Critical alarm clear trap"
::= 7
8.4
Major Alarm Active Trap
loopO9400SMajorAlmActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
DESCRIPTION
"Major alarm active trap"
::= 8
303
8.5
Major Alarm Cleared Trap
loopO9400SMajorAlmClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
DESCRIPTION
"Major alarm clear trap"
::= 9
8.6
Minor Alarm Active Trap
loopO9400SMinorAlmActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
DESCRIPTION
"Minor alarm active trap"
::= 10
304
8.7
Minor Alarm Cleared Trap
loopO9400SMinorAlmClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
DESCRIPTION
"Minor alarm clear trap"
::= 11
8.8
Info Active Trap
loopO9400SInfoActiveTrap TRAP-TYPE
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
DESCRIPTION
"Info active trap"
::= 12
305
8.9
Info Cleared Trap
loopO9400SInfoClearedTrap TRAP-TYPE
alarmQueueSubrack,
alarmQueueUnit,
alarmQueuePortNum,
alarmQueueVcChan,
alarmQueueAlmNum,
alarmQueueAUG1STS3,
alarmQueueVC3STS1,
alarmQueueTUG2VTG,
alarmQueueTU1xVTx,
alarmQueueStatus,
DESCRIPTION
"Info clear trap"
::= 13
8.9.1
alarmQueueUnit
Table 8-1 alarmQueueUnit: Unit index
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.9.2
Unit Number
ea
wa-eb
tg1
tg2
tg3
in-band
rs232
alarmQueueCardModel: Card model type

Table 8-2 alarm Queue Card Model: Card model type
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12
13
20
Card Type
none
e1
t1
e3
t3
fast-EthernetSW
fast-Ethernet
giga-EthernetSW
giga-Ethernet
unknown
Card Type Description

E1 card
T1 card
E3 card
T3 card
Ethernet card with switch
Ethernet card without switch
Giga Ethernet card with switch
Ethernet card without switch
unknow
306
8.9.3
alarmQueuePortNum: Port index

Table 8-3 alarmQueuePortNum: Port index
Number
1~64
100
8.9.4
Port Number
Port 1~Port 64
not-available
alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel
Table 8-4 alarmQueueVcChan: VC channel

Number
1~64
8.9.5
VC channel Number
VC 1~VC 64
alarmQueueAlmNum 0 ~ 30: System alarm

Table 8-5 alarmQueueAlmNum 0 ~ 30: System alarm
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Alarm Type
sys-alm-cutoff
sys-alm-power-fail
sys-alm-ts-sync-loss
sys-alm-sncp-switch
sys-alm-msp-switch
sys-alm-ms-sppring
sys-alm-log-inout
sys-alm-fom-eqp
sys-alm-fom-uneq
sys-alm-external-alarm
sys-alm-sfp-tx-fail-alarm
sys-alm-sfp-rx-fail-alarm
sys-alm-sfp-temperature-alarm
307
8.9.6
alarmQueueAlmNum 30 ~ 74: SDH alarm
Table 8-6 alarmQueueAlmNum 30 ~ 74: SDH alarm

Number
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
Alarm type
pi-los-alarm
rs-lof-alarm
rs-tim-alarm
rs-bip-uas-alarm
ms-sd-alarm
ms-sf-alarm
ms-ais-alarm
ms-rdi-alarm
ms-bip-uas-alarm
ms-rei-uas-alarm
au-lop-alarm
au-ais-alarm
hp-pj-alarm
hp-nj-alarm
hp-sd-alarm
hp-sf-alarm
hp-tim-alarm
hp-uneq-alarm
hp-plm-alarm
hp-vc-ais-alarm
hp-rdi-s-alarm
hp-rdi-c-alarm
hp-rdi-p-alarm
hp-bip-uas-alarm
hp-rei-uas-alarm
hp-lom-alarm
tu-lop-alarm
tu-ais-alarm
lp-pj-alarm
lp-nj-alarm
lp-sd-alarm
lp-sf-alarm
lp-tim-alarm
lp-uneq-alarm
lp-plm-alarm
lp-vc-ais-alarm
lp-rdi-s-alarm
lp-rdi-c-alarm
lp-rdi-p-alarm
lp-bip-uas-alarm
lp-rei-uas-alarm
308

8.9.7
alarmQueueAlmNum 130 ~ 234: SONET alarm

Table 8-7 alarmQueueAlmNum 130 ~ 234: SONET alarm
Number
Alarm type
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
los-pi-alarm
lof-s-alarm
none1
bip-s-uas-alarm
sd-1-alarm
sf-1-alarm
ais-l-alarm
rdi-l-alarm
bip-l-uas-alarm
rei-l-uas-alarm
lop-p-alarm
ais-p-alarm
pj-p-alarm
nj-p-alarm
sd-p-alarm
sf-p-alarm
tim-p-alarm
uneq-p-alarm
plm-p-alarm
vt-ais-p-alarm
rdi-s-p-alarm
rdi-c--p-alarm
rdi-p-p-alarm
bip-uas-alarm
rei-p-uas-alarm
lom-p-alarm
lop-v-alarm
ais-v-alarm
pj-v-alarm
nj-v-alarm
sd-v-alarm
sf-v-alarm
tim-v-alarm
uneq-v-alarm
plm-v-alarm
vt-ais-v-alarm
rdi-s-v-alarm
rdi-c-v-alarm
rdi-p-v-alarm
bip-v-uas-alarm
rei-v-uas-alarm
rs-bip-tca-alarm
ms-bip-tca-alarm
ms-rei-tca-alalrm
hp-bip-tca-alarm
hp-rei-tca-alarm
lp-bip-tca-alarm
lp-rei-tca-alarm
cv-bip-tca-alarm
bip-s-tca-alarm
bip-l-tca-alarm
rei-l-tca-alarm
bip-p-tca-alarm
rei-p-tca-alarm
bip-v-tca-alarm
rei-v-tca-alarm
309
8.9.8
alarmQueueAlmNum 250 ~ 252: E1/T1 alarm

Table 8-8 alarmQueueAlmNum 220 ~ 252:E1/T1 alarm
Number
250
251
252
8.9.9
Alarm type
e1-t1-los-alarm
e1-t1-ais-alarm
e1-t1-cv-alarm
alarmQueueAlmNum 300 ~ 303: Ethernet alarm

Table 8-9 alarmQueueAlmNum 300 ~ 303:Ethernet alarm
Number
300
301
302
303
Alarm type
enet-fcs-err-tca-alarm
enet-err-frame-tca-alarm
enet-fifo-overflow-tca-alarm
enet-link-down-alarm
8.9.10 alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4/ AU3 type in SDH, STS3-C or STS-1 type in

SONET
Table 8-10 alarmQueueVC43STS31Type: AU4 /AU3 type in SDH, STS-3c or
STS-1 type in SONET
Number
1
2
3
4
100
AU4 /AU3 type in SDH, STS-3c or STS-1 type in SONET

no-ho-map
vc4-sts3c
3au3-sts1
au4-tu3
not-available
8.9.11 alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type

Table 8-11 alarmQueueTU1xVTxType: Tu1x type
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
100
Tu1x type
no-lo-map
tu3
au3-sts1
tu11-vt15
tu12-vt2
vc4-bypass
not-available
310
8.9.12 alarmQueueAUG1STS3: The number of STM1

Table 8-12 alarmQueueAUG1STS3: The number of STM1
Number
1
2
3
4
100
STM1 index
aug1-sts3-1
aug1-sts3-2
aug1-sts3-3
aug1-sts3-4
not-available
8.9.13 alarmQueueVC3STS1: The number of STS1

Table 8-13 alarmQueueVC3STS1: The number of STS1
Number
1
2
3
Tug3 index
STS1-1
STS1-2
STS1-3
8.9.14 alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2

Table 8-14 alarmQueueTUG2VTG: The number of Tug2
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Tug2 index
Tug2-1
Tug2-2
Tug2-3
Tug2-4
Tug2-5
Tug2-6
Tug2-7
8.9.15 alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x
Table 8-15 alarmQueueTU1xVTx: The number of Tu1x

Number
1
2
3
4
Tu1x index
Tu1x-1
Tu1x-2
Tu1x-3
Tu1x-4
311
CHAPTER 9 GLOSSARY
9 GLOSSARY
A
AIS
AU

Administrative Unit
B
BER
BIP
Bit Error Rate

Bit Interleaved Parity
O
OOF
Out of Frame
P
PLM
Payload Lable Mismatch
E
ES
ESR
Errored Second
Errored Second Ratio
F
R
RS
Regenerator Section
S
SES
SESR
Severely Errored Second

Severely Errored Second Ratio
T
TIM
U
UAS
Unavailable Second
G
H
HP
HO (higher order) path
L
LOF
LOM
LOS
LP
Loss of Frame
Loss of Multiframe
Loss of Signal
LO (lower order) Path
XYZ
312

O9400s 1us4 V15 M PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

O9400s 1us4 V15 M PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Loop-O9400S-1US4

LOOP TELECOMMUNICATION INTERNATIONAL, INC.

2010 Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Ethernet Interface with Switch .............................................................................................................................. 23

Power Consumption .................................................................................................................................26

EXTERNAL ALARMS ..........................................................................................................................................32

SYSTEM OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................................................33

5.18.2 ALS/APSD Setup Procedure ....................................................................................................................83

5.37 CHANGE FIRMWARE BOOT BANK ...................................................................................................................133

E1 Line Coding Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 137

Unit Diagnostics Setup ...........................................................................................................................141

SNCP User Command ............................................................................................................................144

E1 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................151

5.39 T1 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................153

T1 Line Coding Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 155

Unit Diagnostics Setup ...........................................................................................................................161

SNCP USER Command .........................................................................................................................163

T1 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................170

5.40 E3 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................172

SDH/SONET Path Overhead Setup ................................................................................................................ 174

Unit Diagnostics Setup ...........................................................................................................................177

SNCP USER Command .........................................................................................................................179

E3 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................186

7-Day Performance Report ............................................................................................................................. 187

5.41 T3 SETUP ........................................................................................................................................................188

Line Transmit Length Setup............................................................................................................................ 190

Unit Diagnostics Setup ...........................................................................................................................195

Channel Loopback Setup ................................................................................................................................ 195

SNCP USER Command .........................................................................................................................197

T3 Unit Alarm Mask/Relay Setup................................................................................................................... 199

Clear Performance Data .................................................................................................................................. 202

T3 Performance Report ..........................................................................................................................204

1-Hour Performance Report............................................................................................................................ 204

5.42 ETHERNET SWITCH SETUP...............................................................................................................................207

Payload/LCAS Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 210

Loopback Test ........................................................................................................................................222

VLAN Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 223

5.42.9 MAC Learning Setup .............................................................................................................................250

Payload/LCAS Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 254

Encapsulation Parameter Setup....................................................................................................................... 255

Loopback Test ........................................................................................................................................264

Asynchronous mapping of 44 736 kbps .............................................................................................................. 267

Virtual concatenation .......................................................................................................................................... 272

MSP 1+1 linear.................................................................................................................................................... 273

Regenerator and multiplex section performance monitoring............................................................................... 274

General information ............................................................................................................................................ 277

General information ............................................................................................................................................ 277

Management port................................................................................................................................................. 279

ETHERNET APPENDIX ....................................................................................................................................286

Using Fixed Priority ............................................................................................................................................ 287

Layer 4 TCP/UDP Port Configure(TCP/UDP Port Access Control)......................................................288

Rate Control ...........................................................................................................................................291

O9400S FE (4EoS6SW) Module............................................................................................................297

O9400S FE (4FE4NSW) Module...........................................................................................................300

O9400S (1GE4NSW) Module................................................................................................................301

ALARM TRAP APPENDIX ...............................................................................................................................302

TABLE 5-35 LOW-ORDER PATH OVERHEAD SETTINGS ...................................................................................................157

TABLE 5-96 RATE CTRL/INGRESS WRED SETTING OPTIONS..........................................................................................248

Nr produktet er udtjent, bor det brtskaffes via de s rlige indsamlingssteder i

Ved slutten av produktets levetid br det avhendes p en kommunal miljstasjon

Lmna vnligen in produkten p lmplig tervinningsstation nr den r frbrukad.